Dodge 2009 Caliber Automobile User Manual

R
IBE
C AL
2009
OWNER’S MANUAL
VEHICLES SOLD IN CANADA
With respect to any Vehicles Sold in Canada, the name
Chrysler LLC shall be deemed to be deleted and the
name Chrysler Canada Inc. used in substitution therefore.
DRIVING AND ALCOHOL
Drunken driving is one of the most frequent causes of
accidents.
Your driving ability can be seriously impaired with blood
alcohol levels far below the legal minimum. If you are
drinking, don’t drive. Ride with a designated non-drinking
driver, call a cab, a friend, or use public transportation.
WARNING!
Driving after drinking can lead to an accident. Your
perceptions are less sharp, your reflexes are slower,
and your judgment is impaired when you have been
drinking. Never drink and then drive.
This manual illustrates and describes the operation of
features and equipment that are either standard or optional on this vehicle. This manual may also include a
description of features and equipment that are no longer
available or were not ordered on this vehicle. Please
disregard any features and equipment described in this
manual that are not on this vehicle.
Chrysler LLC reserves the right to make changes in
design and specifications, and/or make additions to or
improvements to its products without imposing any
obligation upon itself to install them on products previously manufactured.
Copyright © 2008 Chrysler LLC
SECTION
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PAGE
1
INTRODUCTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
1
2
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9
2
3
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
3
4
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
4
5
STARTING AND OPERATING . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 245
5
6
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
6
7
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 337
7
8
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 381
8
9
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
9
10
INDEX . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 409
10
INTRODUCTION
1
CONTENTS
䡵 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Identification Number
䡵 How To Use This Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
䡵 Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
䡵 Warnings And Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
.............. 6
4
INTRODUCTION
INTRODUCTION
This Owner’s Manual has been prepared with the assistance of service and engineering specialists to acquaint
you with the operation and maintenance of your vehicle.
It is supplemented by a Warranty Information Booklet
and various customer-oriented documents. You are
urged to read these publications carefully. Following the
instructions and recommendations in this manual will
help assure safe and enjoyable operation of your vehicle.
NOTE: After you read the manual, it should be stored
in the vehicle for convenient referencing and remain
with the vehicle when sold, so that the new owner will
be aware of all safety warnings.
When it comes to service, remember that your authorized
dealer knows your vehicle best, has the factory-trained
technicians and genuine Mopar威 parts, and is interested
in your satisfaction.
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Consult the Table of Contents to determine which section
contains the information you desire.
The detailed index at the back of this Owner’s Manual
contains a complete listing of all subjects.
Consult the following table for a description of the
symbols that may be used on your vehicle or throughout
this Owner’s Manual:
INTRODUCTION
5
1
6
INTRODUCTION
WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS
This Owner’s Manual contains WARNINGS against operating procedures that could result in an accident or
bodily injury. It also contains CAUTIONS against procedures that could result in damage to your vehicle. If you
do not read this entire manual, you may miss important
information. Observe all Warnings and Cautions.
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) is found on the
left front corner of the instrument panel, visible through
the windshield. This number also appears on the vehicle
registration and title.
Vehicle Identification Number
INTRODUCTION
7
VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS
WARNING!
Any modifications or alterations to this vehicle could
seriously affect its roadworthiness and safety and
may lead to an accident resulting in serious injury or
death.
1
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2
CONTENTS
䡵 A Word About Your Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Set The Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
▫ To Disarm The System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 19
▫ Locking Doors With The Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override . . . . . 19
▫ Key-In-Ignition Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
䡵 Remote Keyless Entry — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 20
䡵 Sentry Key威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
▫ To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
▫ Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First
Press . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 21
▫ Customer Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
䡵 Vehicle Security Alarm — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 18
▫ Illuminated Approach — If Equipped . . . . . . . 22
▫ To Lock The Doors And Liftgate . . . . . . . . . . 22
10
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock . . . . . . . . 22
▫ Auto Down . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 33
▫ Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock . . 23
▫ Window Lockout Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Using The Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
䡵 Liftgate
▫ Programming Additional RKE Transmitters . . . 25
䡵 Occupant Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
▫ Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
▫ RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement . . . . . . . 25
▫ Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage . . . 42
䡵 Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt
Operating Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43
▫ Manual Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
▫ Power Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
▫ Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear
Doors) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
䡵 Power Windows — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
▫ Power Window Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
▫ Seat Belt Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
▫ Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
▫ Seat Belts And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . 48
▫ Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) — Airbag . . . . . . . . . . 49
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Child Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
䡵 Engine Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . 70
䡵 Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
▫ Transporting Passengers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
▫ Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
11
▫ Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
▫ Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make
Outside The Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
2
12
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS
The authorized dealer that sold you your new vehicle has
the key code numbers for your vehicle locks. These
numbers can be used to order duplicate keys. Ask your
authorized dealer for these numbers and keep them in a
safe place.
Ignition Key Removal
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
1. Place the shift lever in PARK.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)
position.
3. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
4. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Vehicle Key
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
13
described. If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap
the key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this
safety feature is inoperable. The engine can be started
and stopped but the key cannot be removed until you
obtain service.
WARNING!
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON
4 — START
NOTE: If you try to remove the key before you place the
shift lever in PARK, the key may become trapped temporarily in the ignition switch cylinder. If this occurs,
rotate the key to the right slightly, then remove the key as
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the keys in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
2
14
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
An unlocked car is an invitation to thieves. Always
remove the key from the ignition and lock all the
doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Transmission
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC (Accessory)
position.
2. Push the key and cylinder inward and rotate the key to
the LOCK position.
3. Remove the key from the ignition switch lock cylinder.
Ignition Switch Positions
1 — LOCK
2 — ACC (ACCESSORY)
3 — ON
4 — START
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Locking Doors With The Key
You can insert the key with either side up. To lock the
door, turn the key to the right. To unlock the door, turn
the key to the left. Refer to “Body Lubrication” under
“Maintenance Procedures” in Section 7.
15
is automatic, regardless of whether the vehicle is locked
or unlocked.
Key-In-Ignition Reminder
Opening the driver’s door when the key is in the ignition
and the ignition position is LOCK or ACC, sounds a
signal to remind you to remove the key.
The system uses ignition keys that have an embedded
electronic chip (transponder) to prevent unauthorized
vehicle operation. Therefore, only keys that are programmed to the vehicle can be used to start and operate
the vehicle. The system will shut the engine off in two
seconds if someone uses an invalid key to try to start the
engine.
NOTE: With the driver’s door open and the key in the
ignition, the power door locks will not lock and Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will not function.
NOTE: A key that has not been programmed is also
considered an invalid key, even if it is cut to fit the
ignition switch lock cylinder for that vehicle.
SENTRY KEY姞
The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System prevents unauthorized vehicle operation by disabling the engine. The
system does not need to be armed or activated. Operation
During normal operation, after turning on the ignition
switch, the Vehicle Security Light will turn on for three
seconds for a bulb check. If the light remains on after the
bulb check, it indicates that there is a problem with the
electronics. In addition, if the Vehicle Security Light
begins to flash after the bulb check, it indicates that
2
16
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
someone used an invalid key to try to start the engine.
Either of these conditions will result in the engine being
shut off after two seconds.
starting the vehicle. Cell phones, pagers, or other
Radio Frequency (RF) electronics will not cause interference with this system.
If the Vehicle Security Light turns on during normal
vehicle operation (vehicle running for longer than 10 seconds), it indicates that there is a fault in the electronics.
Should this occur, have the vehicle serviced as soon as
possible.
All of the keys provided with your new vehicle have
been programmed to the vehicle electronics.
NOTE:
• The Sentry Key威 Immobilizer System is not compatible with some aftermarket remote starting systems.
Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting
problems and loss of security protection.
• Exxon/Mobil Speedpass™, additional Sentry Keys威,
or any other transponder-equipped components on
the same key chain will not cause a key-related
(transponder) fault unless the additional part is physically held against the ignition key being used when
Replacement Keys
NOTE: Only keys that are programmed to the vehicle
electronics can be used to start and operate the vehicle.
Once a Sentry Key威 is programmed to a vehicle, it cannot
be programmed to any other vehicle.
CAUTION!
Always remove the Sentry Keys威 from the vehicle
and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
At the time of purchase, the original owner is provided
with a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN).
Keep the PIN in a secure location. This number is
required for authorized dealer replacement of keys. Duplication of keys may be performed at an authorized
dealer or by following the customer key programming
procedure. This procedure consists of programming a
blank key to the vehicle electronics. A blank key is one
that has never been programmed.
NOTE: When having the Sentry Key威 Immobilizer
System serviced, bring all vehicle keys with you to an
authorized dealer.
Customer Key Programming
If you have two valid Sentry Keys威, you can program
new Sentry Keys威 to the system by performing the
following procedure:
1. Cut the additional Sentry Key威 Transponder blank(s)
to match the ignition switch lock cylinder key code.
17
2. Insert the first valid key into the ignition switch. Turn
the ignition switch to the ON position for at least three
seconds, but no longer than 15 seconds. Then, turn the
ignition switch to the LOCK position and remove the first
key.
3. Insert the second valid key into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
15 seconds. After 10 seconds, a chime will sound. In
addition, the Vehicle Security Light will begin to flash.
Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
remove the second key.
4. Insert a blank Sentry Key威 into the ignition switch.
Turn the ignition switch to the ON position within
60 seconds. After 10 seconds, a single chime will sound.
In addition, the Vehicle Security Light will stop flashing.
To indicate that programming is complete, the Vehicle
Security Light will turn on again for three seconds and
then turn off.
2
18
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The new Sentry Key威 is programmed. The Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter will also be programmed during this procedure.
Repeat this procedure to program up to eight keys. If you
do not have a programmed Sentry Key威, contact your
authorized dealer for details.
NOTE: If a programmed key is lost, see your authorized
dealer to have all remaining keys erased from the system’s memory. This will prevent the lost key from
starting your vehicle. The remaining keys must then be
reprogrammed. All vehicle keys must be taken to an
authorized dealer at the time of service to be
reprogrammed.
General Information
The Sentry Key威 system complies with FCC rules Part 15
and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is
subject to the following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference that may be
received, including interference that may cause undesired operation.
VEHICLE SECURITY ALARM — IF EQUIPPED
This Vehicle Security Alarm monitors the doors, hood,
liftgate, and ignition switch for unauthorized operation.
If something triggers the Vehicle Security Alarm the horn
will sound for 30 seconds and flash the lights for 60 seconds. If the triggering device is not deactivated, the horn
will sound again after a five second delay for another
30 seconds. If the trigger remains present, this cycle will
repeat for up to five minutes.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Set The Security Alarm
1. Remove the key from the ignition switch and get out
of the vehicle.
2. Lock the door using either the power door LOCK
switch or the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter
and close all doors.
3. The Vehicle Security Light in the instrument cluster
will flash rapidly for approximately 16 seconds. This
shows that the Vehicle Security Alarm is arming. During
this period, if a door is opened, the ignition switch is
19
turned ON, or the power door locks are unlocked in any
manner, the Vehicle Security Alarm will automatically
disarm. After approximately 16 seconds, the Vehicle
Security Light will flash slowly. This shows that the
Vehicle Security Alarm is fully armed.
To Disarm The System
Press UNLOCK on the RKE transmitter.
Vehicle Security Alarm Manual Override
The Vehicle Security Alarm will not arm if you lock the
doors using the manual door lock plunger.
2
20
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
REMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY — IF EQUIPPED
This system allows you to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate or activate the Panic Alarm from distances up to
approximately 66 ft (20 m) using a handheld Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter. The RKE transmitter
does not need to be pointed at the vehicle to activate the
system.
Three Button RKE Transmitter
NOTE: The line of transmission must not be blocked
with metal objects.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
To Unlock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the UNLOCK button on the RKE
transmitter once to unlock the driver’s door, or twice
within five seconds to unlock all doors and liftgate. The
turn signal lights will flash to acknowledge the unlock
signal. The illuminated entry system will also turn on.
Remote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First Press
This feature lets you program the system to unlock either
the driver’s door or all doors on the first press of the
UNLOCK button on the RKE transmitter. To change the
current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “RKE Unlock,”
under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
21
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the LOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least four seconds, but no longer
than 10 seconds. Then, press and hold the UNLOCK
button while still holding the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
2
22
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are inside the vehicle will activate the
Vehicle Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle
Security Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound.
Press the UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle
Security Alarm.
Illuminated Approach — If Equipped
This feature activates the headlights for up to 90 seconds
when the doors are unlocked with the RKE transmitter.
The time for this feature is programmable on vehicles
equipped with the EVIC. Refer to “Illuminated Approach,” under “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
To Lock The Doors And Liftgate
Press and release the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter to lock all doors and liftgate. The turn signal lights
will flash and the horn will chirp to acknowledge the
signal.
Sound Horn With Remote Key Lock
This feature will cause the horn to chirp when the doors
are locked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be
turned on or turned off. To change the current setting,
proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Sound
Horn with Lock,” under “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press the LOCK button on a programmed RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than 10 seconds. Then, press the PANIC button while still holding
the LOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter with the
ignition switch in the LOCK position and the key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
23
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Flash Lights With Remote Key Lock/Unlock
This feature will cause the turn signal lights to flash when
the doors are locked or unlocked with the RKE transmitter. This feature can be turned on or turned off. To change
the current setting, proceed as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Flash
Light With Lock,” under Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features),” under “Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC)” in Section 4.
2
24
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following steps:
1. Press and hold the UNLOCK button on a programmed
RKE transmitter for at least 4 seconds, but no longer than
10 seconds. Then, press and hold the LOCK button while
still holding the UNLOCK button.
2. Release both buttons at the same time.
3. Test the feature while outside of the vehicle by pressing the LOCK/UNLOCK buttons on the RKE transmitter
with the ignition switch in the LOCK position and the
key removed.
4. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE: Pressing the LOCK button on the RKE transmitter while you are in the vehicle will activate the Vehicle
Security Alarm. Opening a door with the Vehicle Security
Alarm activated will cause the alarm to sound. Press the
UNLOCK button to deactivate the Vehicle Security
Alarm.
Using The Panic Alarm
To turn the Panic Alarm feature ON or OFF, press and
hold the PANIC button on the RKE transmitter for at
least one second and release. When the Panic Alarm is on,
the headlights and park lights will flash, the horn will
pulse on and off and the interior lights will turn on.
The Panic Alarm will stay on for three minutes unless
you turn it off by pressing the PANIC button a second
time or if the vehicle speed is 5 mph (8 km/h) or greater.
NOTE: When you turn off the Panic Alarm by pressing
the PANIC button a second time, you may have to be
closer to the vehicle due to the radio frequency noises of
the system.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
25
Programming Additional RKE Transmitters
Refer to Sentry Key威 “Customer Key Programming.”
If your RKE transmitter fails to operate from a normal
distance, check for these two conditions:
If you do not have a programmed RKE transmitter,
contact your authorized dealer for details.
1. Weak batteries in the RKE transmitter. The expected
life of batteries is five years.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of FCC rules and with
RS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
2. Closeness to a radio transmitter such as a radio station
tower, airport transmitter, military base, and some mobile
or CB radios.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference.
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
NOTE: Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could
void the user’s authority to operate the equipment.
RKE Transmitter Battery Replacement
NOTE: Perchlorate Material – special handling may
apply. See “www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.”
The recommended replacement battery is CR2032.
2
26
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
1. If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
remove the screw. With the RKE transmitter buttons
facing down, use a flat blade to pry the two halves of the
RKE transmitter apart. Make sure not to damage the
elastomer seal during removal.
2. Remove and replace the batteries. Avoid touching the
new batteries with your fingers. Skin oils may cause
battery deterioration. If you touch a battery, clean it with
rubbing alcohol.
3. To reassemble the RKE transmitter case, snap the two
halves together.
NOTE: If the RKE transmitter is equipped with a screw,
reinstall and tighten the screw until snug.
DOOR LOCKS
Separating RKE Transmitter Halves
Manual Door Locks
Use the manual door lock plunger to lock the doors from
inside the vehicle. If the plunger is down when the door
is closed, the door will lock. Make sure the keys are not
inside the vehicle before closing the door.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
27
WARNING! (Continued)
• When leaving the vehicle, always remove the key
from the ignition lock and lock your vehicle. Do
not leave unattended children in the vehicle or
with access to an unlocked vehicle. Unsupervised
use of vehicle equipment may cause severe personal injuries and death.
CAUTION!
An unlocked vehicle is an invitation to thieves.
Always remove the key from the ignition and lock all
of the doors when leaving the vehicle unattended.
Manual Door Lock Plunger
WARNING!
• For personal security and safety in the event of an
accident, lock the vehicle doors as you drive as
well as when you park and leave the vehicle.
(Continued)
Power Door Locks
A power door lock switch is located on the driver’s door
panel. Press this switch to lock or unlock the doors and
liftgate.
2
28
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: To prevent from locking the key in the vehicle,
the power door lock switch will not operate when the key
is in the ignition and either front door is open. A chime
will sound as a reminder to remove the key.
Automatic Door Locks — If Equipped
The doors will lock automatically on vehicles with power
door locks if all of the following conditions are met:
1. The Auto Lock feature is enabled.
2. The transmission is in gear.
3. All doors are closed.
4. The throttle is pressed.
5. The vehicle speed is above 15 mph (24 km/h), and
6. The doors were not previously locked using the power
door lock switch or Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)
transmitter.
Driver Power Door Lock Switch
1 - Unlock
2 - Lock
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Door Locks Programming
The Automatic Door Locks feature can be enabled or
disabled as follows:
• For vehicles equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), refer to “Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)” under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) — If
Equipped” in Section 4.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition
switch.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending
up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
3. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door LOCK
switch to lock the doors.
29
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
NOTE:
• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
• Use the Automatic Door Locks feature in accordance
with local laws.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit
The doors will unlock automatically if:
1. The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature is enabled.
2. The transmission was in gear and the vehicle speed
returned to 0 mph (0 km/h).
2
30
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. The transmission is in NEUTRAL or PARK.
4. The driver’s door is opened.
3. Within 30 seconds, depress the power door UNLOCK
switch to unlock the doors.
5. The doors were not previously unlocked.
4. A single chime will indicate the completion of the
programming.
Automatic Unlock Doors on Exit Programming
The Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature can be
enabled or disabled as follows:
5. Repeat these steps if you want to return this feature to
its previous setting.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, refer to “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)”
under “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) –
If Equipped” in Section 4.
NOTE:
• If you do not hear the chime it means that the system
did not enter the programming mode and you will
need to repeat the procedure.
• For vehicles not equipped with the EVIC, perform the
following procedure:
1. Close all doors and place the key in the ignition.
2. Within 15 seconds, cycle the ignition switch between
LOCK and ON and then back to LOCK four times ending
up in the LOCK position (do not start the engine).
• Use the Automatic Unlock Doors On Exit feature in
accordance with local laws.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
31
Child-Protection Door Lock System (Rear Doors)
— If Equipped
Insert the tip of the ignition key into the lock and rotate
to the LOCK or UNLOCK position.
2
Child-Protection Door Lock Function
WARNING!
Child-Protection Door Lock Location
Avoid trapping anyone in a vehicle in a collision.
Remember that the rear doors can only be opened
from the outside when the child protection locks are
engaged.
32
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: For emergency exit with the system engaged,
move the lock plunger up (unlocked position), roll down
the window and open the door with the outside door
handle.
POWER WINDOWS — IF EQUIPPED
Power Window Switches
Power Window Switch Location
The window controls on the driver’s door trim panel
control all the door windows. There are single window
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
controls on each passenger door trim panel, which operate the passenger door windows. The window controls
will operate when the ignition switch is in the ON or
ACC position.
NOTE:
• For vehicles not equipped with the Electronic Vehicle
Information Center (EVIC), the power window
switches will remain active for 45 seconds after the
ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position. Opening either front door will cancel this feature.
• For vehicles equipped with the EVIC, the power
window switches will remain active for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK
position. Opening either front door will cancel this
feature. The time for this feature is programmable.
Refer to “Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit”
33
under “Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)” in the “Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC),” in Section 4 of this manual.
WARNING!
Never leave children in a vehicle with the key in the
ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended
children, can become entrapped by the windows
while operating the power WINDOW switches. Such
entrapment may result in serious injury or death.
Auto Down
The driver’s door window switch has an Auto Down
feature. Push the window switch past the first detent,
release, and the window will go down automatically. To
cancel the Auto Down movement, operate the switch in
either the up or down direction and release the switch.
2
34
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Window Lockout Switch
The window lockout switch on the driver’s door allows
you to disable the window control on the other doors. To
disable the window controls on the other doors, press the
window LOCKOUT switch. To enable the window controls, press the window LOCKOUT switch a second time.
LIFTGATE
NOTE: The key that is used to start your vehicle is also
used to lock or unlock the doors and open the liftgate.
To unlock the liftgate, insert the key into the lock and
turn it to the right (manual lock models only). The liftgate
can also be unlocked using the Remote Keyless Entry
(RKE) transmitter or by activating the power door lock
switches located on the front doors. The central locking/
unlocking feature (if equipped) can also be activated
from the liftgate key cylinder.
Once unlocked, the liftgate can be opened or closed
without using the key. To open the liftgate, squeeze the
liftgate release and pull the liftgate open with one fluid
motion.
Window Lockout Switch
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
35
• Although the liftgate has no inside release mechanism,
the liftgate trim panel includes an opening with a
snap-in cap that provides access to release the latch in
the event of an electrical system malfunction.
WARNING!
Liftgate Handle
NOTE:
• In the event of a power malfunction, or the RKE
transmitter is inoperative, insert the key into the
liftgate lock cylinder and turn it to the right (manual
lock models only). Using the liftgate handle, pull the
liftgate open with one fluid motion.
• Driving with the liftgate open can allow poisonous exhaust gases into your vehicle. You and your
passengers could be injured by these fumes. Keep
the liftgate closed when you are operating the
vehicle.
• If you are required to drive with the liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed, and the
climate control blower switch is set at high speed.
DO NOT use the recirculation mode.
2
36
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Gas props support the liftgate in the open position.
However, because the gas pressure drops with temperature, it may be necessary to assist the props when
opening the liftgate in cold weather.
OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS
Some of the most important safety features in your
vehicle are the restraint systems. These include the front
and rear seat belts for the driver and all passengers, front
airbags for both the driver and front passenger and if
equipped, side airbags for both the driver and front
passenger. If you will be carrying children too small for
adult-size seat belts, your seat belts or the LATCH feature
also, can be used to hold infant and child restraint
systems.
Please pay close attention to the information in this
section. It tells you how to use your restraint system
properly to keep you and your passengers as safe as
possible.
WARNING!
In a collision, you and your passengers can suffer
much greater injuries if you are not properly buckled
up. You can strike the interior of your vehicle or other
passengers, or you can be thrown out of the vehicle.
Always be sure you and others in your vehicle are
buckled up properly.
Even though you are an excellent driver, buckle up, even
on short trips. Someone on the road may be a poor driver
and cause a collision that includes you. This can happen
far away from home or on your own street.
Research has shown that seat belts save lives, and they
can reduce the seriousness of injuries in a collision. Some
of the worst injuries happen when people are thrown
from the vehicle. Seat belts reduce the possibility of
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
ejection and the risk of injury caused by striking the
inside of the vehicle. Everyone in a motor vehicle should
be belted at all times.
Lap/Shoulder Belts
All the seats in your vehicle are equipped with lap/
shoulder belts.
The belt webbing retractor is designed to lock during
very sudden stops or collisions. This feature allows the
shoulder part of the belt to move freely with you under
normal conditions. But in a collision, the belt will lock
and reduce the risk of your striking the inside of the
vehicle or being thrown out.
37
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
• Wearing a seat belt incorrectly is dangerous. Seat
belts are designed to go around the large bones of
your body. These are the strongest parts of your
body and can take the forces of a collision the best.
(Continued)
2
38
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Wearing your belt in the wrong place could make
your injuries in a collision much worse. You might
suffer internal injuries, or you could even slide out
of part of the belt. Follow these instructions to
wear your seat belt safely and to keep your passengers safe, too.
• Two people should never be belted into a single
seat belt. People belted together can crash into one
another in an accident, hurting one another badly.
Never use a lap/shoulder belt or lap belt for more
than one person, no matter what their size.
2. The seat belt latch plate is above the back of the front
seat, next to your arm. Grasp the latch plate and pull out
the belt. Slide the latch plate up the webbing as far as
necessary to allow the belt to go around your lap.
Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating Instructions
1. Enter the vehicle and close the door. Sit back and
adjust the seat.
Pulling Out the Latch Plate
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
3. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
39
WARNING!
• A belt that is buckled into the wrong buckle will
not protect you properly. The lap portion could
ride too high on your body, possibly causing
internal injuries. Always buckle your belt into the
buckle nearest you.
• A belt that is too loose will not protect you as well.
In a sudden stop you could move too far forward,
increasing the possibility of injury. Wear your seat
belt snugly.
(Continued)
Inserting Latch Plate into Buckle
2
40
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• A belt that is worn under your arm is very dangerous. Your body could strike the inside surfaces of
the vehicle in a collision, increasing head and neck
injury. A belt worn under the arm can cause
internal injuries. Ribs aren’t as strong as shoulder
bones. Wear the belt over your shoulder so that
your strongest bones will take the force in a
collision.
• A shoulder belt placed behind you will not protect
you from injury during a collision. You are more
likely to hit your head in a collision if you do not
wear your shoulder belt. The lap and shoulder belt
are meant to be used together.
4. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
tilt the latch plate and pull on the lap belt. A snug belt
reduces the risk of sliding under the belt in a collision.
Positioning Lap Belt
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• A lap belt worn too high can increase the risk of
internal injury in a collision. The belt forces won’t
be at the strong hip and pelvic bones, but across
your abdomen. Always wear the lap belt as low as
possible and keep it snug.
• A twisted belt can’t do its job as well. In a collision
it could even cut into you. Be sure the belt is
straight. If you can’t straighten a belt in your
vehicle, take it to your authorized dealer and have
it fixed.
5. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
41
6. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
The belt will automatically retract to its stowed position.
If necessary, slide the latch plate down the webbing to
allow the belt to retract fully.
WARNING!
A frayed or torn belt could rip apart in a collision and
leave you with no protection. Inspect the belt system
periodically, checking for cuts, frays, or loose parts.
Damaged parts must be replaced immediately. Do
not disassemble or modify the system. Seat belt
assemblies must be replaced after a collision if they
have been damaged (bent retractor, torn webbing,
etc.).
2
42
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Belt Anchorage
In the front seat, the shoulder belt can be adjusted
upward or downward to position the belt away from
your neck. Push the anchorage button to release the
anchorage, and move it up or down to the position that
fits you best.
NOTE: The adjustable upper shoulder belt anchorage is
equipped with an Easy Up feature. This feature allows
the shoulder belt anchorage to be adjusted in the upward
position without pressing the release button. To verify
the shoulder belt anchorage is latched, pull downward
on the shoulder belt anchorage until it is locked into
position.
Adjustable Anchorage
As a guide, if you are shorter than average, you will
prefer a lower position, and if you are taller than average,
you’ll prefer a higher position. When you release the
anchorage, try to move it down to make sure that it is
locked in position.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Second Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating
Instructions
The second row center lap/shoulder belt features a three
point seat belt with a mini-latch and buckle, which allows
the shoulder belt to detach from the lower anchor when
the seat is folded. The mini-buckle and shoulder belt can
then be stored out of the way in the right side trim panel
for added convenience.
43
2
1. Remove the mini-latch and regular latch from its
stowed position in the right rear side trim panel.
Mini-Latch Stowage
44
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
2. Grasp the mini-latch plate and pull the belt over the
seat.
3. Route the shoulder belt to the inside of the right head
restraint.
Routing the Rear Center Shoulder Belt
4. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the minilatch plate into the mini-buckle until you hear a “click.”
Routing the Rear Center Shoulder Belt
5. Sit back in seat. Slide the regular latch plate up the
webbing as far as necessary to allow the belt to go around
your lap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
6. When the belt is long enough to fit, insert the latch
plate into the buckle until you hear a “click.”
45
on the shoulder belt. To loosen the lap belt if it is too tight,
pull on the lap belt. A snug belt reduces the risk of sliding
under the belt in a collision.
Connecting Mini-Latch to Buckle
7. Position the lap belt across your thighs, below your
abdomen. To remove slack in the lap belt portion, pull up
Rear Center Seat Belt Buckled
8. Position the shoulder belt on your chest so that it is
comfortable and not resting on your neck. The retractor
will withdraw any slack in the belt.
2
46
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
9. To release the belt, push the red button on the buckle.
slide the latch plate down the webbing to allow the belt
to retract fully. Insert the mini-latch plate into the slot
provided in the trim panel.
Seat Belt Pretensioners
The seat belts for both front seating positions are
equipped with pretensioning devices that are designed to
remove slack from the seat belt in the event of a collision.
These devices improve the performance of the seat belt
by assuring that the belt is tight about the occupant early
in a collision. Pretensioners work for all size occupants,
including those in child restraints.
Detaching Mini-Latch And Buckle
10. To disengage the mini-latch from the mini-buckle for
storage, insert the regular latch plate into the black
button on the top of the mini-buckle. The belt will
automatically retract to its stowed position. If necessary,
NOTE: These devices are not a substitute for proper seat
belt placement by the occupant. The seat belt still must be
worn snugly and positioned properly.
The pretensioners are triggered by the front airbag control module (see Driver and Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) — Airbag Section). Like the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
47
front airbags, the pretensioners are single use items. After
a collision that is severe enough to deploy the airbags and
pretensioners, both must be replaced.
BeltAlert威 Programming
BeltAlert威 can be enabled or disabled by your authorized
dealer or by performing the following procedure:
Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System
(BeltAlert姞)
If the driver’s seat belt has not been buckled within
60 seconds of starting the vehicle and if the vehicle speed
is greater than 5 mph (8 km/h), the Enhanced Seat Belt
Use Reminder System (BeltAlert威) will alert the driver to
buckle their seat belt. The driver should also instruct all
other occupants to buckle their seat belts. Once the
warning is triggered, BeltAlert威 will continue to chime
and flash the Seat Belt Reminder Light for 96 seconds or
until the driver’s seat belt is buckled. BeltAlert威 will be
reactivated if the driver’s seat belt is unbuckled for more
than 10 seconds and the vehicle speed is greater than
5 mph (8 km/h).
NOTE: The following steps must occur within the first
60 seconds of the ignition switch being turned to the ON
or START position. Chrysler LLC does not recommend
deactivating BeltAlert威.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position and
buckle the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt.
2. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position and wait
for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn off.
3. Within 60 seconds of turning the ignition switch to the
ON position, unbuckle and then re-buckle the driver’s or
front passenger’s seat belt at least three times within
10 seconds, ending with the seat belt buckled.
2
48
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Watch for the Seat Belt Reminder Light to turn
on while unbuckling and off while re-buckling the seat
belt. It may be necessary to retract the seat belt.
4. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position. A
single chime will sound to signify that you have successfully completed the programming.
BeltAlert威 can be reactivated by repeating this procedure.
NOTE: Although BeltAlert威 has been deactivated, the
Seat Belt Reminder Light will continue to illuminate
while the driver’s or front passenger’s seat belt remains
unbuckled.
Seat Belts And Pregnant Women
We recommend that pregnant women use the seat belts
throughout their pregnancy. Keeping the mother safe is
the best way to keep the baby safe.
Pregnant women should wear the lap part of the belt
across the thighs and as snug across the hips as possible.
Keep the belt low so that it does not come across the
abdomen. That way the strong bones of the hips will take
the force if there is a collision.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
49
Driver And Front Passenger Supplemental
Restraint System (SRS) — Airbag
This vehicle has airbags for both the driver and front
passenger as a supplement to the seat belt restraint
systems. The driver’s front airbag is mounted in the
center of the steering wheel. The passenger’s front airbag
is mounted in the instrument panel, above the glove
compartment. The words SRS AIRBAG are embossed on
the airbag covers.
2
Airbag and Knee Bolster Location
1 — Driver Airbag
3 — Knee Bolster
2 — Passenger Airbag
4 — Knee Bolster
NOTE: The front airbags are certified to the Federal
regulations that allow less forceful deployment.
50
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The front airbags have a multistage inflator design. This
may allow the airbag to have different rates of inflation
that are based on collision severity.
This vehicle may also be equipped with side curtain
airbags to protect the driver and passengers sitting next
to a window. If the vehicle is equipped with side curtain
airbags, they are located above the side windows. Their
covers are also labeled SRS AIRBAG.
Side Curtain Airbag Location
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
51
WARNING!
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not put anything on or around the airbag
covers or attempt to manually open them. You may
damage the airbags and you could be injured
because the airbags are not there to protect you.
These protective covers for the airbag cushions are
designed to open only when the airbags are inflating.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not use accessory seat covers or place objects
between you and the side airbags; the performance
could be adversely affected and/or objects could
be pushed into you, causing serious injury.
• If your vehicle is equipped with side airbags, do
not attach cup holders or any other objects on or
around the door. The inflating side airbag could
drive the object into occupants, causing serious
injury.
(Continued)
Airbags inflate in moderate to high speed impacts. Along
with seat belts and pretensioners, front airbags work with
the driver inflatable knee blocker and the integrated
passenger knee blocker (non-inflatable) to provide improved protection for the driver and front passenger. Side
airbags also work with seat belts to improve occupant
protection.
The seat belts are designed to protect you in many types
of collisions. The front airbags deploy in moderate to
severe frontal collisions. If your vehicle is equipped, the
side airbag on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered in
2
52
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
moderate to severe side collisions. In certain types of
collisions, both the front and side airbags may be triggered. But even in collisions where the airbags work, you
need the seat belts to keep you in the right position for
the airbags to protect you properly.
Here are some simple steps you can take to minimize the
risk of harm from a deploying airbag:
1. Children 12 years old and younger should always
ride buckled up in the rear seat.
WARNING!
Infants in rear-facing child restraints should NEVER
ride in the front seat of a vehicle with a passenger
front airbag. An airbag deployment can cause severe
injury or death to infants in that position.
Children who are not big enough to wear the vehicle seat
belt properly (see Section on Child Restraints) should be
secured in the rear seat in child restraints or beltpositioning booster seats. Older children who do not use
child restraints or belt-positioning booster seats should
ride properly buckled up in the rear seat. Never allow
children to slide the shoulder belt behind them or under
their arms.
If a child from 1 to 12 years old must ride in the front
passenger seat because the vehicle is crowded, move the
seat as far back as possible and use the proper child
restraint. Refer to the Section on Child Restraints.
You should read the instructions provided with your
child restraint to make sure that you are using it properly.
2. All occupants should wear their lap and shoulder
belts properly.
3. The driver and front passenger seats should be
moved back as far as practical to allow the front airbags
room to inflate.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
4. If your vehicle has side airbags, do not lean against
the door; airbags will inflate forcefully into the space
between you and the door.
5. If the airbag system in this vehicle needs to be
modified to accommodate a disabled person, contact
the Customer Center. Phone numbers are provided
under ⴖIf You Need Assistanceⴖ in Section 9 of this
manual.
WARNING!
• Relying on the airbags alone could lead to more
severe injuries in a collision. The airbags work
with your seat belt to restrain you properly. In
some collisions, the airbags won’t deploy at all.
Always wear your seat belt even though you have
airbags.
(Continued)
53
WARNING! (Continued)
• Being too close to the steering wheel or instrument
panel during front airbag deployment could cause
serious injury. Airbags need room to inflate. Sit
back, comfortably extending your arms to reach
the steering wheel or instrument panel.
• If the vehicle has side airbags, they also need room
to inflate. Do not lean against the door. Sit upright
in the center of the seat.
The front airbag system consists of the following:
• Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC)
• Side Remote Acceleration Sensors (If Equipped)
• Airbag Warning Light
• Driver Airbag
• Front Passenger Airbag
2
54
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• Supplemental Side Curtain Airbags Above Side Windows (If Equipped)
• Steering Wheel and Column
• Instrument Panel
• Interconnecting Wiring
• Seat Belt Reminder Light
• Knee Impact Bolsters
• Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
• Front Acceleration Sensors
• Driver and Front Passenger Seat Belt Pretensioners
How The Airbag System Works
• The Occupant Restraint Controller (ORC) determines
if a frontal collision is severe enough to require the
airbags to inflate. The front airbag inflators are designed to provide different rates of airbag inflation
from direction provided by the ORC. This ORC will
detect roll over.
The ORC also monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in
the START or ON position. These include all of the
items listed above except the knee bolster, the instrument panel, and the steering wheel and column. If the
key is in the LOCK position, in the ACC position, or
not in the ignition, the airbags are not on and will not
inflate.
• The ORC also turns on the Airbag Warning
Light in the instrument panel for six to eight
seconds as a self-check when the ignition is
first turned on. After the self-check, the
Airbag Warning Light will turn off. If the ORC detects
a malfunction in any part of the system, it turns on the
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Airbag Warning Light either momentarily or continuously. A single chime will sound if the light comes on
again after initial start up.
WARNING!
Ignoring the AIRBAG Warning Light in your instrument panel could mean you won’t have the airbags to
protect you in a collision. If the light does not come
on, stays on after you start the vehicle, or if it comes
on as you drive, have the airbag system checked right
away.
• The Driver and Passenger Airbag/Inflator Units are
located in the center of the steering wheel and the right
side of the instrument panel. When the ORC detects a
collision requiring the airbags, it signals the inflator
units. A large quantity of nontoxic gas is generated to
inflate the front airbags. Different airbag inflation rates
55
may be possible based on collision severity and occupant size. The steering wheel hub trim cover and the
upper right side of the instrument panel separate and
fold out of the way as the bags inflate to their full size.
The bags fully inflate in about 50 - 70 milliseconds.
This is about half of the time it takes to blink your eyes.
The bags then quickly deflate while helping to restrain
the driver and front passenger. The driver’s front
airbag gas is vented through vent holes in the sides of
the airbag. The passenger’s front airbag gas is vented
through vent holes in the sides of the airbag. In this
way, the airbags do not interfere with your control of
the vehicle.
• The Side Impact (SRS) Side Curtain Airbags (If
Equipped) are designed to activate only in certain side
collisions.
2
56
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
The ORC module determines if a side collision is
severe enough to require the side airbags to inflate.
The side airbag control module will not detect roll
over, front or rear collisions.
The ORC module monitors the readiness of the electronic
parts of the system whenever the ignition switch is in the
START or ON position. These include all of the items
previously mentioned.
In moderate to severe side collisions, the side airbag
inflator on the crash side of the vehicle is triggered,
releasing a quantity of nontoxic gas. The side curtain
airbag moves at a very high speed and with such a high
force, that it could injure you if you are not seated
properly, or if items are positioned in the area where the
side curtain airbag inflates. This especially applies to
children.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with left and right
side curtain airbags, do not install a clothing bar
mounted to the coat hooks (or similarly mounted). A
clothing bar will impede the proper performance of the
bags.
• When the ORC and the impact sensors detect a
collision requiring the Driver Inflatable Knee
Blocker, it signals the inflator unit. A quantity of
nontoxic gas is generated to inflate the Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker. The Driver Inflatable Knee Blocker
inflates rearward toward the driver’s knees to help
protect the knees and position the driver for the best
interaction with the front airbag. The Driver Inflatable
Knee Blocker fully inflates in about 50 milliseconds;
this is only about half of the time it takes you to blink
your eyes. It then quickly deflates while helping to
protect the driver’s knees.
• The Knee Impact Bolsters help protect the knees and
position everyone for the best interaction with the
front airbag.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Unapproved modifications or service procedures to
the front passenger seat assembly, its related components, or seat cover may inadvertently change the
airbag deployment in case of a frontal crash. This
could result in death or serious injury to the front
seat passenger if the vehicle is involved in an accident. A modified vehicle may not comply with required Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards (FMVSS).
If A Deployment Occurs
The airbag systems are designed to deploy when the
airbag control modules detect a moderate-to-severe collision. They help restrain the driver and front passenger
and then they immediately deflate.
57
NOTE: A frontal collision that is not severe enough to
need airbag protection will not activate the system. This
does not mean something is wrong with the airbag
system.
If you do have a collision which deploys the airbags, any
or all of the following may occur:
• The nylon airbag material may sometimes cause abrasions and/or skin reddening to the driver and front
passenger as the airbags deploy and unfold. The
abrasions are similar to friction rope burns or those
you might get sliding along a carpet or gymnasium
floor. They are not caused by contact with chemicals.
They are not permanent and normally heal quickly.
However, if you haven’t healed significantly within a
few days, or if you have any blistering, see your doctor
immediately.
2
58
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
• As the airbags deflate you may see some smoke-like
particles. The particles are a normal by-product of the
process that generates the nontoxic gas used for airbag
inflation. These airborne particles may irritate the skin,
eyes, nose, or throat. If you have skin or eye irritation,
rinse the area with cool water. For nose or throat
irritation, move to fresh air. If the irritation continues,
see your doctor. If these particles settle on your
clothing, follow the garment manufacturer’s instructions for cleaning.
• It is not advisable to drive your vehicle after the
airbags have deployed. If you are involved in another
collision, the airbags will not be in place to protect you.
WARNING!
Deployed airbags can’t protect you in another collision. Have the airbags replaced by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
Enhanced Accident Response System
In the event of an impact that causes airbag deployment,
with the vehicle stopped, the vehicle communication
network intact, and the power intact, the Enhanced
Accident Response System performs the following functions:
• Cuts off fuel to the engine.
• Flashes the hazard lights.
• Turns on the interior lights, which remain on as long as
the battery has power or until the ignition key is
removed.
• Unlocks the doors automatically.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintaining Your Airbag System
WARNING!
• Modifications to any part of the airbag system
could cause it to fail when you need it. You could
be injured because the airbags are not there to
protect you. Do not modify the components or
wiring, including adding any kind of badges or
stickers to the steering wheel hub trim cover or the
upper passenger side of the instrument panel. Do
not modify the front bumper, vehicle body structure, or frame.
• You need proper knee impact protection in a
collision. Do not mount or locate any aftermarket
equipment on or behind the knee impact bolster.
• It is dangerous to try to repair any part of the
airbag system yourself. Be sure to tell anyone who
works on your vehicle that it has airbags.
59
Airbag Warning Light
You will want to have the airbags ready to
inflate for your protection in an impact. While
the airbag system is designed to be maintenance free, if any of the following occurs, have
an authorized dealer service the system promptly:
• The Airbag Warning Light does not come on or flickers
during the six to eight seconds when the ignition
switch is first turned on.
• The light remains on or flickers after the six to eight
second interval.
• The light flickers or comes on and remains on while
driving.
Event Data Recorder (EDR)
In the event of an accident, your vehicle is designed to
record up to five seconds of specific vehicle data parameters (see list below) in an event data recorder prior to the
2
60
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
moment of airbag deployment, or near-deployment, and
up to a quarter second of high-speed deceleration data
during and/or after air bag deployment or neardeployment. EDR data are ONLY recorded if an airbag
deploys, or nearly deploys, and are otherwise unavailable.
NOTE:
1. A near-deployment event occurs when the airbag
sensor detects severe vehicle deceleration usually indicative of a crash, but not severe enough to warrant airbag
deployment.
2. Under certain circumstances, EDR data may not be
recorded (e.g., loss of battery power).
In conjunction with other data gathered during a complete accident investigation, the electronic data may be
used by Chrysler LLC and others to learn more about the
possible causes of crashes and associated injuries in order
to assess and improve vehicle performance. In addition
to crash investigations initiated by Chrysler LLC, such
investigations may be requested by customers, insurance
carriers, government officials, and professional crash
researchers, such as those associated with universities,
and with hospital and insurance organizations.
In the event that an investigation is undertaken by
Chrysler LLC (regardless of initiative), the company or its
designated representative will first obtain permission of
the appropriate custodial entity for the vehicle (usually
the vehicle owner or lessee) before accessing the electronic data stored, unless ordered to download data by a
court with legal jurisdiction (i.e., pursuant to a warrant).
A copy of the data will be provided to the custodial entity
upon request. General data that does not identify particular vehicles or crashes may be released for incorporation in aggregate crash databases, such as those maintained by the U.S. government and various states. Data of
a potentially sensitive nature, such as would identify a
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
61
particular driver, vehicle, or crash, will be treated confidentially. Confidential data will not be disclosed by
Chrysler LLC to any third party except when:
• ⬙Time⬙ of airbag deployment (in terms of ignition
cycles and vehicle mileage)
1. Used for research purposes, such as to match data
with a particular crash record in an aggregate database,
provided confidentiality of personal data is thereafter
preserved
• Impact acceleration and angle
2. Used in defense of litigation involving a Chrysler LLC
product
• Accelerator status (including vehicle speed)
3. Requested by police under a legal warrant
4. Otherwise required by law
Data Parameters that May Be Recorded:
• Diagnostic trouble code(s) and warning lamp status
for electronically-controlled safety systems, including
the airbag system
• Airbag disable lamp status (if equipped)
• Airbag deployment level (if applicable)
• Seat Belt status
• Brake status (service and parking brakes)
• Engine control status (including engine speed)
• Transmission gear selection
• Cruise control status
• Traction/stability control status
• Tire pressure monitoring system status
2
62
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Child Restraints
Everyone in your vehicle needs to be buckled up all the
time, including babies and children. Every state in the
United States and all Canadian provinces require that
small children ride in proper restraint systems. This is the
law, and you can be prosecuted for ignoring it.
Children 12 years and younger should ride properly
buckled up in a rear seat, if available. According to crash
statistics, children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seats rather than in the front.
WARNING!
In a collision, an unrestrained child, even a tiny baby,
can become a missile inside the vehicle. The force
required to hold even an infant on your lap could
become so great that you could not hold the child, no
matter how strong you are. The child and others
could be badly injured. Any child riding in your
vehicle should be in a proper restraint for the child’s
size.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Infants and Child Restraints
There are different sizes and types of restraints for
children from newborn size to the child almost large
enough for an adult safety belt. Always check the child
seat owner’s manual to ensure you have the correct seat
for your child. Use the restraint that is correct for your
child:
• Safety experts recommend that children ride
rearward-facing in the vehicle until they are at least
one year old and weigh at least 20 lbs (9 kg). Two types
of child restraints can be used rearward-facing: infant
carriers and convertible child seats. Both types of child
restraints are held in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder
belt or the LATCH child restraint anchorage system.
• The infant carrier is only used rearward-facing in the
vehicle. It is recommended for children who weigh up
to about 20 lbs (9 kg). Convertible child seats can be
used either rearward-facing or forward-facing in the
63
vehicle. Convertible child seats often have a higher
weight limit in the rearward-facing direction than
infant carriers do, so they can be used rearward-facing
by children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) but are
less than one year old.
WARNING!
Rearward-facing child seats must NEVER be used in
the front seat of a vehicle with a front passenger
airbag. An airbag deployment could cause severe
injury or death to infants in this position.
Older Children and Child Restraints
• Children who weigh more than 20 lbs (9 kg) and who
are older than one year can ride forward-facing in the
vehicle. Forward-facing child seats and convertible
child seats used in the forward-facing direction are for
children who weigh 20 to 40 lbs. (9 to 18 kg) and who
2
64
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
are older than one year. These child seats are also held
in the vehicle by the lap/shoulder belt or the LATCH
child restraint anchorage system.
• The belt-positioning booster seat is for children weighing more than 40 lbs (18 kg), but who are still too small
to fit the vehicle’s seat belts properly. If the child
cannot sit with knees bent over the vehicle’s cushion
while the child’s back is against the seatback; they
should use a belt positioning booster seat. The child
and booster seat are held in the vehicle by the lap/
shoulder belt. (Some booster seats are equipped with a
front shield and are held in the vehicle by the lap
portion).
NOTE:
For additional information, refer
www.seatcheck.org or call 1–866–SEATCHECK.
to
WARNING!
• Improper installation can lead to failure of an
infant or child restraint. It could come loose in a
collision. The child could be badly injured or
killed. Follow the manufacturer’s directions exactly when installing an infant or child restraint.
• A rearward-facing child restraint should only be
used in a rear seat. A rearward-facing child restraint in the front seat may be struck by a deploying passenger airbag which may cause severe or
fatal injury to the infant.
Here are some tips on getting the most out of your child
restraint:
• Before buying any restraint system, make sure that it
has a label certifying that it meets all applicable Safety
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
65
Standards. We also recommend that you make sure
that you can install the child restraint in the vehicle
where you will use it before you buy it.
belt tight; however, any seat belt system will loosen
with time, so check the belt occasionally and pull it
tight if necessary.
• The restraint must be appropriate for your child’s
weight and height. Check the label on the restraint for
weight and height limits.
If the seat belt has a switchable retractor, it will have a
distinctive label. To operate the switchable retractor,
please refer to Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR) in this
section.
• Carefully follow the instructions that come with the
restraint. If you install the restraint improperly, it may
not work when you need it.
The passenger seat belts are equipped with either
cinching latch plates or seat belt retractors that can be
switched to an automatic locking mode, which are
designed to keep the lap portion tight around the child
restraint so that it is not necessary to use a locking clip.
If the seat belt has a cinching latch plate, pulling up on
the shoulder portion of the lap/shoulder belt will
tighten the belt. The cinching latch plate will keep the
• In the rear seat, you may have trouble tightening the
lap/shoulder belt on the child restraint because the
buckle or latch plate is too close to the belt path
opening on the restraint. Disconnect the latch plate
from the buckle and twist the short buckle end of the
belt several times to shorten it. Insert the latch plate
into the buckle with the release button facing out.
• If the belt still can’t be tightened, or if by pulling and
pushing on the restraint loosens the belt, disconnect
the latch plate from the buckle, turn the latch plate
2
66
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
around, and insert the latch plate into the buckle
again. If you still can’t make the child restraint secure,
try a different seating position.
the retractor, pulling on the excess webbing to tighten the
lap portion about the child restraint. Follow the instructions of the child restraint manufacture.
• Buckle the child into the seat according to the child
restraint manufacturer’s directions.
NOTE: To reset this feature, you must let all of the belt
webbing return into the retractor. You will not be able to
pull out more webbing until all of the webbing has been
returned back into the retractor.
• When your child restraint is not in use, secure it in the
vehicle with the seat belt or remove it from the vehicle.
Don’t leave it loose in the vehicle. In a sudden stop or
collision, it could strike the occupants or seat backs
and cause serious personal injury.
Automatic Locking Retractor (ALR)
To operate the switchable retractor, pull the belt from the
retractor until there is enough to allow you to pass
through the child restraint and slide the latch plate into
the buckle. Then pull on the belt until it is completely
extended from the retractor. Allow the belt to return into
LATCH — Child Seat Anchorage System (Lower
Anchors and Tether for CHildren)
WARNING!
Child restraint anchorages are designed to withstand
only those loads imposed by correctly fitted child
restraints. Under no circumstances are they to be
used for adult seat belts, harnesses, or for attaching
other items or equipment to the vehicle.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Your vehicle is equipped with the child restraint anchorage system called LATCH. The LATCH system provides
for the installation of the child restraint without using the
vehicle seat belt. All three rear seating positions have
lower anchorages that are capable of accommodating
LATCH-compatible child seats having flexible, webbingmounted lower attachments. Child seats with fixed lower
attachments must be installed in the outboard positions
only. Regardless of the specific type of lower attachment,
NEVER install LATCH-compatible child seats such that
two seats share a common lower anchorage. If you are
installing LATCH-compatible child restraints in adjacent
rear seating positions, you can use the LATCH anchors or
the vehicle’s seat belt for the outboard position, but you
must use the vehicle’s seat belt at the center position. If
your child restraints are not LATCH-compatible, you can
only install the child restraints using the vehicle’s seat
belts. Please refer to “Installing the Child Restraint System” for typical installation instructions.
67
2
Rear Seat LATCH Anchorages
Child restraint systems having attachments designed to
connect to the lower anchorages are now available. Child
restraints having tether straps and hooks for connection
to the top tether anchorage have been available for some
time. In fact, many child restraint manufacturers will
68
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
provide add-on tether strap kits for some of their older
products. Tether anchorage kits are also available for
most older vehicles.
Because the lower anchorages are to be introduced to
passenger carrying vehicles over a period of years, child
restraint systems having attachments for those anchorages will continue to have features for installation in
vehicles using the lap or lap/shoulder belt. They will also
have tether straps, and you are urged to take advantage
of all of the available attachments provided with your
child restraint in any vehicle.
NOTE: When using the LATCH attaching system to
install a child restraint, please ensure that all seat belts
not being used for occupant restraints are stowed and out
of reach of children. It is recommended that before
installing the child restraint, buckle the seat belt so the
seat belt is tucked behind the child restraint and out of
reach. If the buckled seat belt interferes with the child
restraint installation, instead of tucking the seat belt
behind the child restraint, route the seat belt through the
child restraint belt path and then buckle it. This should
stow the seat belt out of the reach of an inquisitive child.
Remind all children in the vehicle that the seat belts are
not toys and should not be played with, and never leave
your unattended child in the vehicle.
Installing the Child Restraint System
We urge you to carefully follow the directions of the
manufacturer when installing your child restraint. Many,
but not all, restraint systems will be equipped with
separate straps on each side, with each having a hook or
connector and a means for adjusting the tension in the
strap. Forward-facing toddler restraints and some
rearward-facing infant restraints will also be equipped
with a tether strap with a hook and means for adjusting
the tension in the strap.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
69
In general, you will first loosen the adjusters on the lower
and tether straps so that you can more easily attach the
hook or connector to the lower and tether anchorages.
The tether strap should be routed under the center of the
head restraint and attached to the tether anchor on the
rear of the seat back. Then tighten all three straps as you
push the child restraint rearward and downward into the
seat.
2
Rear Seat Tether Anchors
Not all child restraint systems will be installed as we
have described here. Again, carefully follow the instructions that come with the child restraint system.
NOTE: If your child restraint seat is not LATCHcompatible, install the restraint using the vehicle seat
belts.
70
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
An incorrectly anchored tether strap could lead to
increased head motion and possible injury to the
child. Use only the anchor position directly behind
the child seat to secure a child restraint top tether
strap.
Children Too Large For Booster Seats
Children who are large enough to wear the shoulder belt
comfortably, and whose legs are long enough to bend
over the front of the seat when their back is against the
seatback, should use the lap/shoulder belt in a rear seat.
• Make sure that the child is upright in the seat.
• The lap portion should be low on the hips and as snug
as possible.
• Check the belt fit periodically. A child’s squirming or
slouching can move the belt out of position.
• If the shoulder belt contacts the face or neck, move the
child closer to the center of the vehicle. Never allow a
child to put the shoulder belt under an arm or behind
his/her back.
Transporting Pets
Airbags deploying in the front seat could harm your pet.
An unrestrained pet will be thrown about and possibly
injured, or could injure a passenger during panic braking
or in a collision.
Pets should be restrained in the rear seat in pet harnesses
or pet carriers that are secured by seat belts.
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS
A long break-in period is not required for the engine in
your vehicle.
Drive moderately during the first 300 miles (500 km).
After the initial 60 miles (100 km), speeds up to 50 or
55 mph (80 or 90 km/h) are desirable.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
While cruising, brief full-throttle acceleration within the
limits of local traffic laws, contributes to a good break-in.
Wide-open throttle acceleration in low gear can be detrimental and should be avoided.
The engine oil installed in the engine at the factory is a
high-quality energy conserving type lubricant. Oil
changes should be consistent with anticipated climate
conditions under which vehicle operations will occur.
The recommended viscosity and quality grades are
shown under “Engine Oil”, under “Maintenance Procedures” in section 7 of this manual. NON-DETERGENT
OR STRAIGHT MINERAL OILS MUST NEVER BE
USED.
A new engine may consume some oil during its first few
thousand miles (kilometers) of operation. This should be
considered as a normal part of the break-in and not
interpreted as an indication of difficulty.
71
SAFETY TIPS
Transporting Passengers
NEVER TRANSPORT PASSENGERS IN THE CARGO
AREA.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and
using a seat belt properly.
2
72
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Exhaust Gas
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO), which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing (CO)
follow these safety tips:
Do not run the engine in a closed garage or in confined
areas any longer than needed to move your vehicle in or
out of the area.
If it is necessary to sit in a parked vehicle with the engine
running, adjust your heating or cooling controls to force
outside air into the vehicle. Set the blower at high speed.
If you are required to drive with the trunk/liftgate open,
make sure that all windows are closed and the climate
control BLOWER switch is set at high speed. DO NOT
use the recirculation mode.
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
Whenever a change is noticed in the sound of the exhaust
system, when exhaust fumes can be detected inside the
vehicle, or when the underside or rear of the vehicle is
damaged, have a competent mechanic inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken,
damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open
seams or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes
to seep into the passenger compartment. In addition,
inspect the exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised
for lubrication or oil change. Replace as required.
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Safety Checks You Should Make Inside The
Vehicle
Seat Belts
Inspect the belt system periodically, checking for cuts,
frays, and loose parts. Damaged parts must be replaced
immediately. Do not disassemble or modify the system.
Front seat belt assemblies must be replaced after a
collision. Rear seat belt assemblies must be replaced after
a collision if they have been damaged (i.e., bent retractor,
torn webbing, etc.). If there is any question regarding belt
or retractor condition, replace the belt.
Airbag Warning Light
The light should come on and remain on for six to eight
seconds as a bulb check when the ignition switch is first
turned ON. If the light is not lit during starting, see your
authorized dealer. If the light stays on, flickers, or comes
on while driving, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
73
Defroster
Check operation by selecting the defrost mode and place
the blower control on high speed. You should be able to
feel the air directed against the windshield. See your
authorized dealer for service if your defroster is
inoperable.
Periodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside
The Vehicle
Tires
Examine tires for excessive tread wear and uneven wear
patterns. Check for stones, nails, glass, or other objects
lodged in the tread. Inspect the tread and sidewall for
cuts and cracks. Check the wheel nuts for tightness.
Check the tires (including spare) for proper pressure.
2
74
THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE
Lights
Have someone observe the operation of exterior lights
while you work the controls. Check turn signal and high
beam indicator lights on the instrument panel.
Door Latches
Check for positive closing, latching, and locking.
Fluid Leaks
Check area under vehicle after overnight parking for fuel,
engine coolant, oil, or other fluid leaks. Also, if gasoline
fumes are detected or if fuel, power steering fluid, or
brake fluid leaks are suspected, the cause should be
located and corrected immediately.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
3
䡵 Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
䡵 uconnect威 phone — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ Inside Day/Night Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85
▫ Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Phone Call Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94
▫ Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side . . . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side . . . . . . . . . 80
▫ uconnect威 phone Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96
▫ Advanced Phone Connectivity . . . . . . . . . . . 101
▫ Power Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
▫ Things You Should Know About Your
uconnect威 phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103
▫ Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Sun Visor Sliding Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
76
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
䡵 Voice Recognition System (VR) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
▫ Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation . . . 112
▫ Commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
▫ Voice Training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
䡵 Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Front Seat Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
▫ Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
▫ Manual Lumbar — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Driver’s Seatback Recline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
▫ Adjustable Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Heated Seats — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
▫ Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat . . . . . . . . . . . 122
▫ Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
▫ Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 To Open And Close The Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
䡵 Lights
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Multifunction Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Headlights, Parking Lights And Instrument
Panel Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
▫ Lights-On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
▫ Fog Lights — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
▫ High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . 129
▫ Flash-To-Pass . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
▫ Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
䡵 Windshield Wipers And Washers . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Windshield Wiper Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . 131
▫ Intermittent Wiper System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
▫ Mist Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
䡵 Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
77
▫ To Vary The Speed Setting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
▫ To Accelerate For Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
䡵 Garage Door Opener — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 138
▫ Programming HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139
▫ Gate Operator/Canadian Programming . . . . 142
▫ Using HomeLink威 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142
䡵 Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped . . . . . 134
▫ Reprogramming A Single HomeLink威
Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ To Activate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 135
▫ Security . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ To Set At A Desired Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ Troubleshooting Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
▫ To Deactivate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
▫ To Resume Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 136
䡵 Power Sunroof — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
3
78
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Opening The Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
䡵 Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Closing The Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
▫ Pinch Protect Feature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Pinch Protect Override . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
▫ Venting Sunroof — Express . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Sunshade Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Sunroof Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
▫ Ignition Off Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
䡵 Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
䡵 Power Inverter — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
䡵 Cupholders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
䡵 Console Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
▫ Cargo Cover — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
▫ Removable Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
▫ Cargo Tie-Down Loops . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
▫ Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped . . . . . . . 158
䡵 Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Rear Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
▫ Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
䡵 Cooled Beverage Storage Bin/Glove
Compartment — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
79
MIRRORS
Inside Day/Night Mirror
A two-point pivot system allows for horizontal and
vertical mirror adjustment. Adjust the mirror to center on
the view through the rear window.
3
Headlight glare can be reduced by moving the small
control under the mirror to the night position (toward the
rear of vehicle). The mirror should be adjusted while set
in the day position (toward the windshield).
Adjusting Rearview Mirror
80
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Automatic Dimming Inside Mirror — If Equipped
This mirror automatically adjusts for headlight glare
from vehicles behind you. You can turn the feature on or
off by pressing the button at the base of the mirror. A light
next to the button will illuminate to indicate when the
dimming feature is activated.
CAUTION!
To avoid damage to the mirror during cleaning, never
spray any cleaning solution directly onto the mirror.
Apply the solution onto a clean cloth and wipe the
mirror clean.
Outside Mirror — Driver’s Side
Adjust the flat (drivers side) outside mirror so you can
just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the mirror
closest to the vehicle with your head close to the door
glass.
Outside Mirror — Passenger’s Side
Adjust the convex (passenger side) outside mirror so you
can just see the side of your vehicle in the part of the
mirror closest to the vehicle with your head close to the
center of the vehicle.
Automatic Dimming Mirror
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
81
Power Mirrors — If Equipped
The control for the power mirrors is located on the
drivers door trim panel.
3
Power Mirror Control
82
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To adjust a mirror, turn the control wand toward the left
or right mirror positions indicated. Tilt the control wand
in the direction you want the mirror to move. When
finished adjusting the mirror, turn the control to the
center position to prevent accidentally moving a mirror.
Mirror Directions
WARNING!
Vehicles and other objects seen in the passenger side
convex mirror will look smaller and farther away
than they really are. Relying too much on your
passenger side mirror could cause you to collide with
another vehicle or other object. Use your inside
mirror when judging the size or distance of a vehicle
seen in this convex mirror.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Vanity Mirrors — If Equipped
To use the vanity mirror, rotate the sun visor down and
swing the mirror cover upward.
Vanity Mirror
Sun Visor Sliding Feature
The sun visors may be extended out to provide more
coverage of the side glass.
83
uconnect姞 phone — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code RER and REU radios contain an
integrated uconnect威 phone. Refer to your “Navigation
User’s Manual” for uconnect威 phone operating instructions for these radios. Radio sales code can be located
on the lower right corner of the Radio faceplate.
uconnect威 phone is a voice-activated, hands-free, invehicle communications system. uconnect威 allows you to
dial a phone number with your cellular phone using
simple voice commands (e.g., ⬙Call” ѧ “Mike” ѧ”Work⬙ or
⬙Dial” ѧ “248-555-1212⬙). Your cellular phone’s audio is
transmitted through your vehicle’s audio system; the
system will automatically mute your radio when using
the uconnect威 phone.
3
84
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The uconnect威 phone requires a cellular phone
equipped with the Bluetooth威 ⬙Hands-Free Profile,⬙
Version 0.96 or higher. See the uconnect威 website for
supported phones.
For uconnect威 customer support, visit the following
websites:
• www.chrysler.com/uconnect
• www.dodge.com/uconnect
• www.jeep.com/uconnect
• or call 1–877–855–8400
uconnect威 allows you to transfer calls between the system and your cellular phone as you enter or exit your
vehicle and enables you to mute the system’s microphone
for private conversation.
The uconnect威 phone is driven through your Bluetooth威
“Hands-Free Profile” cellular phone. uconnect威 features
Bluetooth威 technology - the global standard that enables
different electronic devices to connect to each other
without wires or a docking station, so uconnect威 phone
works no matter where you stow your cellular phone (be
it your purse, pocket, or briefcase), as long as your phone
is turned on and has been paired to the vehicle’s
uconnect威 phone. The uconnect威 phone allows up to
seven cellular phones to be linked to the system. Only
one linked (or paired) cellular phone can be used with the
system at a time. The system is available in English,
Spanish, or French languages.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Button
The rearview mirror contains the microphone
for the system (depending on the type of
mirror and radio equipped), and either the
radio or the mirror has the two control buttons
(PHONE Button and VOICE RECOGNITION button)
that will enable you to access the system.
Voice Recognition Button
Actual button location may vary with the radio. The individual buttons are described in the
“Operation” section.
The uconnect威 phone can be used with any Hands-Free
Profile certified Bluetooth威 cellular phone. See the
uconnect威 website for supported phones. If your cellular
phone supports a different profile (e.g., Headset Profile)
you may not be able to use any uconnect威 phone
features. Refer to your cellular service provider or the
phone manufacturer for details.
85
The uconnect威 phone is fully integrated with the vehicle’s audio system. The volume of the uconnect威 phone
can be adjusted either from the radio volume control
knob or from the steering wheel radio control (right
switch), if so equipped.
The radio display will be used for visual prompts from
the uconnect威 phone such as ⬙CELL⬙ or caller ID on
certain radios.
Operation
Voice commands can be used to operate the uconnect威
phone and to navigate through the uconnect威 phone
menu structure. Voice commands are required after most
uconnect威 phone prompts. You will be prompted for a
specific command and then guided through the available
options.
• Prior to giving a voice command, one must wait for
the beep, which follows the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt or another
prompt.
3
86
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• For certain operations, compound commands can be
used. For example, instead of saying ⬙Setup⬙ and then
⬙Phone Pairing,⬙ the following compound command
can be said: ⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• For each feature explanation in this section, only the
combined form of the voice command is given. You
can also break the commands into parts and say each
part of the command when you are asked for it. For
example, you can use the combined form voice command ⬙Phonebook New Entry,⬙ or you can break the
combined form command into two voice commands:
⬙Phonebook⬙ and ⬙New Entry.⬙ Please remember, the
uconnect威 phone works best when you talk in a
normal conversational tone, as if speaking to someone
sitting a few feet/meters away from you.
Voice Command Tree
Refer to “Voice Tree” in this section.
Help Command
If you need assistance at any prompt, or if you want to
know your options at any prompt, say ⬙Help⬙ following
the beep. The uconnect威 phone will play all the options at
any prompt if you ask for help.
To activate the uconnect威 phone from idle, simply press
the PHONE button and follow the audible prompts for
directions. All uconnect威 phone sessions begin with a
press of the PHONE button on the radio control head.
Cancel Command
At any prompt, after the beep, you can say ⬙Cancel⬙ and
you will be returned to the main menu. However, in a
few instances the system will take you back to the
previous menu.
Pair (Link) uconnect威 phone to a Cellular Phone
To begin using your uconnect威 phone, you must pair
your compatible Bluetooth威 enabled cellular phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
87
To complete the pairing process, you will need to reference your cellular phone Owner’s Manual. The
uconnect威 website may also provide detailed instructions
for pairing.
• For identification purposes, you will be prompted to
give the uconnect威 phone a name for your cellular
phone. Each cellular phone that is paired should be
given a unique phone name.
The following are general phone to uconnect威 phone
pairing instructions:
• You will then be asked to give your cellular phone a
priority level between one and seven, with one being
the highest priority. You can pair up to seven cellular
phones to your uconnect威 phone. However, at any
given time, only one cellular phone can be in use,
connected to your uconnect威 phone. The priority
allows the uconnect威 phone to know which cellular
phone to use if multiple cellular phones are in the
vehicle at the same time. For example, if priority three
and priority five phones are present in the vehicle, the
uconnect威 phone will use the priority three cellular
phone when you make a call. You can select to use a
lower priority cellular phone at any time (refer to
⬙Advanced Phone Connectivity⬙ in this section).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• When prompted, after the beep, say ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ and
follow the audible prompts.
• You will be asked to say a four-digit Personal Identification Number (PIN), which you will later need to
enter into your cellular phone. You can enter any
four-digit PIN. You will not need to remember this PIN
after the initial pairing process.
3
88
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Dial by Saying a Number
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Dial.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the number you
want to call.
• For example, you can say ⬙234-567-8901⬙.
• The uconnect威 phone will confirm the phone number
and then dial. The number will appear in the display
of certain radios.
Call by Saying a Name
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
“Call.⬙
• The system will prompt you to say the name of the
person you want to call.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the person you want to call. For example,
you can say ⬙John Doe,⬙ where John Doe is a previously stored name entry in the uconnect威 phonebook
or downloaded phonebook. To learn how to store a
name in the phonebook, refer to ⬙Add Names to Your
uconnect威 Phonebook,⬙ in the phonebook.
• The uconnect威 system will confirm the name and then
dial the corresponding phone number, which may
appear in the display of certain radios.
Add Names to Your uconnect威 Phonebook
NOTE: Adding names to the uconnect威 phonebook is
recommended when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook New Entry.⬙
• When prompted, say the name of the new entry. Use of
long names helps the voice recognition and it is
recommended. For example, say ⬙Robert Smith⬙ or
⬙Robert⬙ instead of ⬙Bob.⬙
• When prompted, enter the number designation (e.g.,
⬙Home,⬙ ⬙Work,⬙ ⬙Mobile,⬙ or ⬙Pager⬙). This will allow
you to store multiple numbers for each phonebook
entry, if desired.
• When prompted, recite the phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are adding.
After you are finished adding an entry into the phonebook, you will be given the opportunity to add more
phone numbers to the current entry or to return to the
main menu.
89
The uconnect威 phone will allow you to enter up to 32
names in the phonebook with each name having up to
four associated phone numbers and designations. Each
language has a separate 32-name phonebook accessible
only in that language. In addition, if equipped and
supported by your phone, uconnect威 phone automatically downloads your cellular phone’s phonebook.
Phonebook Download – Automatic Phonebook
Transfer From Cellular Phone
If equipped and specifically supported by your phone,
uconnect威 phone automatically downloads names (text
names) and number entries from the cellular phone’s
phonebook. Specific Bluetooth威 Phones with Phone Book
Access Profile may support this feature. See uconnect威
website for supported phones.
• To call a name from downloaded (or uconnect威)
Phonebook, follow the procedure in “Call by Saying a
Name” section.
3
90
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Automatic download and update, if supported, begins
as soon as the Bluetooth威 wireless phone connection is
made to the uconnect威 phone, for example, after you
start the vehicle.
• A maximum of 1000 entries per phone will be downloaded and updated every time a phone is connected
to the uconnect威 phone.
• Depending on the maximum number of entries downloaded, there may be a short delay before the latest
downloaded names can be used. Until then, if available, the previous downloaded phonebook is available
for use.
• Only the phonebook of the currently connected cellular phone is accessible.
• Only the cellular phone’s phonebook is downloaded.
SIM card phonebook is not part of the Mobile phonebook.
• This downloaded phonebook cannot be edited or
deleted on the uconnect威 phone. These can only be
edited on the cellular phone. The changes are transferred and updated to uconnect威 phone on the next
phone connection.
Phonebook Download — Single Entry
If equipped and supported by your phone, uconnect威
phone allows the user to download entries from their
phone via Bluetooth威. To use this feature, press the
PHONE button and say “Phonebook Download.” The
system prompts, “Ready to accept “V” card entry via
Bluetooth威…” The system is now ready to accept phonebook entries from your phone using the Bluetooth威
Object Exchange Profile (OBEX). Please see your phone
Owner’s Manual for specific instructions on how to send
these entries from your phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE:
• The phone handset must support Bluetooth威 OBEX
transfers of phonebook entries to use this feature.
• Some phones cannot send phonebook entries if they
are already connected to any system via Bluetooth威,
and you may see a message on the phone display that
the Bluetooth威 link is busy. In this case, the user must
first disconnect or drop the Bluetooth威 connection to
the uconnect威 phone, and then send the address book
entry via Bluetooth威. Please see your phone Owner’s
Manual for specific instructions on how to drop the
Bluetooth威 connection.
• If the phonebook entry is longer than 24 characters, it
will only use the first 24 characters.
91
Edit uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
NOTE:
• Editing names in the phonebook is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Edit.⬙
• You will then be asked for the name of the phonebook
entry that you wish to edit.
• Next, choose the number designation (home, work,
cellular, or pager) that you wish to edit.
• When prompted, recite the new phone number for the
phonebook entry that you are editing.
3
92
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After you are finished editing an entry in the phonebook,
you will be given the opportunity to edit another entry in
the phonebook, call the number you just edited, or return
to the main menu.
⬙Phonebook Edit⬙ can be used to add another phone
number to a name entry that already exists in the
phonebook. For example, the entry John Doe may have a
cellular and a home number, but you can add ”John
Doe’s” work number later using the ⬙Phonebook Edit⬙
feature.
Delete uconnect威 Phonebook Entry
NOTE: Editing phonebook entries is recommended
when the vehicle is not in motion.
• After you enter the Phonebook Delete menu, you will
then be asked for the name of the entry that you wish
to delete. You can either say the name of a phonebook
entry that you wish to delete or you can say ⬙List
Names⬙ to hear a list of the entries in the phonebook
from which you choose. To select one of the entries
from the list, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
while the uconnect威 phone is playing the desired entry
and say ⬙Delete.⬙
• After you enter the name, the uconnect威 phone will
ask you which designation you wish to delete: home,
work, cellular, pager, or all. Say the designation you
wish to delete.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• Note that only the phonebook entry in the current
language is deleted.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Delete.⬙
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete/Erase “All” uconnect威 Phonebook Entries
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook Erase All.⬙
• The uconnect威 phone will ask you to verify that you
wish to delete all the entries from the phonebook.
• After confirmation, the phonebook entries will be
deleted.
• Note that only the phonebook in the current language
is deleted.
• Automatic downloaded phonebook entries cannot be
deleted or edited.
List All Names in the uconnect威 Phonebook
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
93
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Phonebook List Names.⬙
• The uconnect威 phone will play the names of all the
phonebook entries, including the downloaded phonebook entries, if available.
• To call one of the names in the list, press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button during the playing of the
desired name, and say ⬙Call.⬙
NOTE: The user can also exercise ⬙Edit⬙ or ⬙Delete⬙
operations at this point.
• The uconnect威 phone will then prompt you as to the
number designation you wish to call.
• The selected number will be dialed.
3
94
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Phone Call Features
The following features can be accessed through the
uconnect威 phone if the feature(s) are available on your
cellular service plan. For example, if your cellular service
plan provides three-way calling, this feature can be
accessed through the uconnect威 phone. Check with your
cellular service provider for the features that you have.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - Call
Currently in Progress
If a call is currently in progress and you have another
incoming call, you will hear the same network tones for
call waiting that you normally hear when using your
cellular phone. Press the PHONE button to place the
current call on hold and answer the incoming call.
Answer or Reject an Incoming Call - No Call
Currently in Progress
When you receive a call on your cellular phone, the
uconnect威 phone will interrupt the vehicle audio system,
if on, and will ask if you would like to answer the call.
Press the PHONE button to accept the call. To reject the
call, press and hold the PHONE button until you hear a
single beep, indicating that the incoming call was
rejected.
NOTE: The uconnect威 phone compatible phones in the
market today do not support rejecting an incoming call
when another call is in progress. Therefore, the user can
only answer an incoming call or ignore it.
Making a Second Call While Current Call is in
Progress
To make a second call while you are currently on a call,
press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Dial⬙
or ⬙Call⬙ followed by the phone number or phonebook
entry you wish to call. The first call will be on hold while
the second call is in progress. To go back to the first call,
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
refer to ⬙Toggling Between Calls⬙ in this section. To
combine two calls, refer to ⬙Conference Call⬙ in this
section.
Place/Retrieve a Call From Hold
To put a call on hold, press the PHONE button until you
hear a single beep. This indicates that the call is on hold.
To bring the call back from hold, press and hold the
PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Toggling Between Calls
If two calls are in progress (one active and one on hold),
press the PHONE button until you hear a single beep,
indicating that the active and hold status of the two calls
have switched. Only one call can be placed on hold at a
time.
95
Conference Call
When two calls are in progress (one active and one on
hold), press and hold the PHONE button until you hear
a double beep indicating that the two calls have been
joined into one conference call.
Three-Way Calling
To initiate three-way calling, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button while a call is in progress, and make a
second phone call, as described under ⬙Making a Second
Call While Current Call is in Progress.⬙ After the second
call has established, press and hold the PHONE button
until you hear a double beep, indicating that the two calls
have been joined into one conference call.
Call Termination
To end a call in progress, momentarily press the PHONE
button. Only the active call(s) will be terminated and if
there is a call on hold, it will become the new active call.
If the active call is terminated by the far end, a call on
3
96
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
hold may not become active automatically. This is cell
phone-dependent. To bring the call back from hold, press
and hold the PHONE button until you hear a single beep.
Redial
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Redial.⬙
• The uconnect威 phone will call the last number that
was dialed from your cellular phone.
NOTE: This may not be the last number dialed from the
uconnect威 phone.
Call Continuation
Call continuation is the progression of a phone call on the
uconnect威 phone after the vehicle ignition key has been
switched to OFF. Call continuation functionality available on the vehicle can be any one of three types:
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone either until the call
ends, or until the vehicle battery condition dictates
cessation of the call on the uconnect威 phone and
transfer of the call to the cellular phone.
• After the ignition key is switched to OFF, a call can
continue on the uconnect威 phone for a certain duration, after which the call is automatically transferred
from the uconnect威 phone to the cellular phone.
• An active call is automatically transferred to the
cellular phone after the ignition key is switched to
OFF.
uconnect姞 phone Features
Language Selection
To change the language that the uconnect威 phone is
using:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
97
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
the name of the language you wish to switch to
English, Espanol, or Francais.
If the phone is not reachable and the uconnect威 phone is
operational, you may reach the emergency number as
follows:
• Continue to follow the system prompts to complete
the language selection.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
After selecting one of the languages, all prompts and
voice commands will be in that language.
NOTE: After every uconnect威 phone language change
operation, only the language-specific 32-name phonebook is usable. The paired phone name is not languagespecific and usable across all languages.
Emergency Assistance
If you are in an emergency and the cellular phone is
reachable:
• Pick up the phone and manually dial the emergency
number for your area.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Emergency⬙ and the uconnect威 phone will instruct
the paired cellular phone to call the emergency number. This feature is supported in the U.S., Canada, and
Mexico.
NOTE:
• The emergency number dialed is based on the country
where the vehicle is purchased (911 for the U.S. and
Canada and 060 for Mexico). The number dialed may
not be applicable with the available cellular service
and area.
3
98
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say ‘Setup’, followed by ‘Emergency’.
• The uconnect威 phone does slightly lower your chances
of successfully making a phone call as to that for the
cell phone directly.
WARNING!
Your phone must be turned on and paired to the
uconnect威 phone to allow use of this vehicle feature
in emergency situations, when the cell phone has
network coverage and stays paired to the uconnect威
phone.
Towing Assistance
If you need towing assistance:
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Towing Assistance.⬙
NOTE:
• The towing assistance number dialed is based on the
country where the vehicle is purchased (1-800-5282069 for the U.S., 1-877-213-4525 for Canada, 55-143454 for Mexico City and 1-800-712-3040 for outside
Mexico City in Mexico).
• If supported, this number may be programmable on
some systems. To do this, press the PHONE button
and say “Setup”, followed by “Towing Assistance”.
Paging
To learn how to page, refer to ⬙Working with Automated
Systems.⬙ Paging works properly except for pagers of
certain companies, which time out a little too soon to
work properly with the uconnect威 phone.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Voice Mail Calling
To learn how to access your voice mail, refer to ⬙Working
with Automated Systems.⬙
Working with Automated Systems
This method is used in instances where one generally has
to press numbers on the cellular phone keypad while
navigating through an automated telephone system.
You can use your uconnect威 phone to access a voice mail
system or an automated service, such as a paging service
or automated customer service line. Some services require immediate response selection. In some instances,
that may be too quick for use of the uconnect威 phone.
When calling a number with your uconnect威 phone that
normally requires you to enter in a touch-tone sequence
on your cellular phone keypad, you can press the VOICE
RECOGNITION button and say the sequence you wish
to enter, followed by the word ⬙Send.⬙ For example, if
required to enter your PIN followed with a pound, (3 7 4
99
6 #), you can press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙3 7 4 6 # Send.⬙ Saying a number, or sequence of
numbers, followed by ⬙Send,⬙ is also to be used for
navigating through an automated customer service center menu structure, and to leave a number on a pager.
You can also send stored uconnect威 phonebook entries as
tones for fast and easy access to voice mail and pager
entries. To use this feature, dial the number you wish to
call and then press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, “Send.” The system will prompt you to enter the
name or number and say the name of the phonebook
entry you wish to send. The uconnect威 phone will then
send the corresponding phone number associated with
the phonebook entry, as tones over the phone.
NOTE:
• You may not hear all of the tones due to cellular phone
network configurations. This is normal.
3
100
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• Some paging and voice mail systems have system time
out settings that are too short and may not allow the
use of this feature.
Barge In - Overriding Prompts
The “Voice Recognition” button can be used when you
wish to skip part of a prompt and issue your voice
recognition command immediately. For example, if a
prompt is asking ⬙Would you like to pair a phone, clear
a...,⬙ you could press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
and say, ⬙Pair a Phone⬙ to select that option without
having to listen to the rest of the voice prompt.
Turning Confirmation Prompts ON/OFF
Turning confirmation prompts off will stop the system
from confirming your choices (e.g., the uconnect威 phone
will not repeat a phone number before you dial it).
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Confirmations.⬙ The uconnect威 phone will play
the current confirmation prompt status and you will
be given the choice to change it.
Phone and Network Status Indicators
If available on the radio and/or on a premium display
such as the instrument panel cluster, and supported by
your cellular phone, the uconnect威 phone will provide
notification to inform you of your phone and network
status when you are attempting to make a phone call
using uconnect威 phone. The status is given for roaming,
network signal strength, phone battery strength, etc.
Dialing Using the Cellular Phone Keypad
You can dial a phone number with your cellular phone
keypad and still use the uconnect威 phone (while dialing
via the cellular phone keypad, the user must exercise
caution and take precautionary safety measures). By
dialing a number with your paired Bluetooth威 cellular
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
phone, the audio will be played through your vehicle’s
audio system. The uconnect威 phone will work the same
as if you dial the number using voice recognition.
NOTE: Certain brands of cellular phones do not send
the dial ring to the uconnect威 phone to play it on the
vehicle audio system, so you will not hear it. Under this
situation, after successfully dialing a number the user
may feel that the call did not go through even though the
call is in progress. Once your call is answered, you will
hear the audio.
Mute/Un-Mute (Mute OFF)
When you mute the uconnect威 phone, you will still be
able to hear the conversation coming from the other
party, but the other party will not be able to hear you. In
order to mute the uconnect威 phone:
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute.⬙
101
In order to un-mute the uconnect威 phone:
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button.
• Following the beep, say ⬙Mute off.⬙
Advanced Phone Connectivity
Transfer Call to and from Cellular Phone
The uconnect威 phone allows ongoing calls to be transferred from your cellular phone to the uconnect威 phone
without terminating the call. To transfer an ongoing call
from your uconnect威 phone paired cellular phone to the
uconnect威 phone or vice versa, press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say ⬙Transfer Call.⬙
Connect or Disconnect Link Between the
uconnect威 phone and Cellular Phone
Your cellular phone can be paired with many different
electronic devices, but can only be actively ⬙connected⬙
with one electronic device at a time.
3
102
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
If you would like to connect or disconnect the Bluetooth威
connection between a uconnect威 phone paired cellular
phone and the uconnect威 phone, follow the instructions
described in your cellular phone User’s Manual.
Select Another Cellular Phone
This feature allows you to select and start using another
phone paired with the uconnect威 phone.
List Paired Cellular Phone Names
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Select Phone⬙ and follow the prompts.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the “Ready” prompt and the following beep, say
“Setup Phone Pairing.”
• When prompted, say ⬙List Phones.⬙
• The uconnect威 phone will play the phone names of all
paired cellular phones in order from the highest to the
lowest priority. To “select” or “delete” a paired phone
being announced, press the VOICE RECOGNITION
button and say “Select” or “Delete.” Also, see the next
two sections for an alternate way to “select” or “delete” a paired phone.
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone that you wish to select.
• The selected phone will be used for the next phone
call. If the selected phone is not available, the
uconnect威 phone will return to using the highest
priority phone present in or near (approximately
within 30 ft (9 m)) the vehicle.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Delete uconnect威 phone Paired Cellular Phones
• Press the PHONE button to begin.
• After the ⬙Ready⬙ prompt and the following beep, say
⬙Setup Phone Pairing.⬙
• At the next prompt, say ⬙Delete⬙ and follow the
prompts.
• You can also press the VOICE RECOGNITION button
at any time while the list is being played, and then
choose the phone you wish to delete.
103
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, the uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used. To enter this
training mode, follow one of the two following procedures:
From outside the uconnect威 phone mode (e.g., from radio
mode):
• Press and hold the VOICE RECOGNITION button for
five seconds until the session begins, or,
Things You Should Know About Your uconnect姞
phone
• Press the VOICE RECOGNITION button and say the
⬙Setup, Voice Training⬙ command.
uconnect威 phone Tutorial
To hear a brief tutorial of the system features, press the
PHONE button and say “uconnect威 Tutorial.”
Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by the
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked
with the engine running, all windows closed, and the
blower fan switched off.
3
104
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This procedure may be repeated with a new user. The
system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
• Performance is maximized under:
To restore the Voice Recognition system to factory default
settings, enter the Voice Training session via the above
procedure and follow the prompts.
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
Voice Recognition (VR)
• smooth road surface,
• For best performance, adjust the rearview mirror to
provide at least 1⁄2 in (1 cm) gap between the overhead
console (if equipped) and the mirror.
• fully closed windows,
• Always wait for the beep before speaking.
• Speak normally, without pausing, just as you would
speak to a person sitting a few feet/meters away from
you.
• Make sure that no one other than you is speaking
during a voice recognition period.
• low-to-medium blower setting,
• low road noise,
• dry weather condition.
• Even though the system is designed for users speaking
in North American English, French, and Spanish accents, the system may not always work for some.
• When navigating through an automated system such
as voice mail, or when sending a page, at the end of
speaking the digit string, make sure to say ⬙Send.⬙
• Storing names in the phonebook when the vehicle is
not in motion is recommended.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
• It is not recommended to store similar sounding
names in the uconnect威 phonebook.
• Phonebook (Downloaded and uconnect威 phone Local)
name recognition rate is optimized when the entries
are not similar.
• You can say ⬙O⬙ (letter ⬙O⬙) for ⬙0⬙ (zero). ⬙800⬙ must be
spoken ⬙eight-zero-zero.⬙
• Even though international dialing for most number
combinations is supported, some shortcut dialing
number combinations may not be supported.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
Far End Audio Performance
• Audio quality is maximized under:
• low-to-medium blower setting,
105
• low-to-medium vehicle speed,
• low road noise,
• smooth road surface,
• fully closed windows,
• dry weather conditions, and
• operation from the driver’s seat.
• Performance, such as audio clarity, echo, and loudness
to a large degree rely on the phone and network, and
not the uconnect威 phone.
• Echo at the far end can sometimes be reduced by
lowering the in-vehicle audio volume.
• In a convertible vehicle, system performance may be
compromised with the convertible top down.
3
106
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Bluetooth威 Communication Link
Cellular phones have been found to lose connection to
the uconnect威 phone. When this happens, the connection
can generally be reestablished by switching the phone
off/on. Your cellular phone is recommended to remain in
Bluetooth威 ON mode.
Power-Up
After switching the ignition key from OFF to either the
ON or ACC position, or after a language change, you
must wait at least five seconds prior to using the system.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
107
3
108
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
109
3
110
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
zero
one
two
three
four
five
six
seven
eight
nine
star (*)
plus (+)
pound (#)
add location
all
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
call
cancel
confirmation prompts
continue
delete
dial
download
edit
emergency
English
erase all
Espanol
Francais
help
home
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Primary
language
list names
list phones
mobile
mute
mute off
new entry
no
pager
pair a phone
phone pairing
phonebook
previous
record again
redial
Voice Commands
Alternate(s)
pairing
phone book
Voice Commands
Primary
Alternate(s)
return to main menu
return or main menu
select phone
select
send
set up
phone settings or phone
set up
towing assistance
transfer call
uconnect威 Tutorial
try again
voice training
work
yes
111
3
112
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• Changes or modifications not expressly approved by
the party responsible for compliance could void the
user’s authority to operate the equipment.
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
VOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) — IF
EQUIPPED
Voice Recognition System (VR) Operation
This Voice Recognition system allows you to
control your AM, FM radio, satellite radio, disc
player, and a memo recorder.
NOTE: Take care to speak into the Voice Interface
System as calmly and normally as possible. The ability of
the Voice Interface System to recognize user voice commands may be negatively affected by rapid speaking or a
raised voice level.
WARNING!
Any voice commanded system should be used only
in safe driving conditions and all attention should be
kept on the roadway ahead. Failure to do so may
result in an accident causing serious injury or death.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
When you press the VR button, you will hear a beep. The
beep is your signal to give a command.
NOTE: If you do not say a command within a few
seconds, the system will present you with a list of
options.
If you ever wish to interrupt the system while it lists
options, press the VR button, listen for the beep, and say
your command.
Pressing the VR button while the system is speaking is
known as “barging in.” The system will be interrupted
and after the beep you can add or change commands.
This will become helpful once you start to learn the
options.
NOTE: At any time, you can say the words “Cancel”,
“Help”, or “Main Menu”.
113
These commands are universal and can be used from any
menu. All other commands can be used depending upon
the active application.
For example, if you are in the disc menu and you are
listening to FM radio, you can speak commands from the
disc menu or from the FM radio menu.
When using this system, you should speak clearly and at
a normal speaking volume.
The system will best recognize your speech if the windows are closed, and the heater/air-conditioning fan is
set to low.
At any point, if the system does not recognize one of your
commands, you will be prompted to repeat it.
To hear the first available Menu, press the VR button and
say “Help” or “Main Menu”.
3
114
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Commands
The Voice Recognition system understands two types of
commands. Universal commands are available at all
times. Local commands are available if the supported
radio mode is active.
Changing the Volume
1. Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button.
2. Say a command (e.g., “Help”).
3. Use the ON/OFF VOLUME rotary knob to adjust the
volume to a comfortable level while the Voice Recognition system is speaking. Please note the volume setting
for VR is different than the audio system.
Main Menu
Start a dialogue by pressing the VR button. You may say
“Main Menu” to switch to the main menu.
In this mode, you can say the following commands:
• “Radio” (to switch to the radio mode)
• “Disc” (to switch to the disc mode)
• “Memo” (to switch to the memo recorder)
• “System Setup” (to switch to system setup)
Radio AM (or Radio Long Wave or Radio Medium
Wave — If Equipped)
To switch to the AM band say “AM” or “Radio AM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Radio FM
To switch to the FM band say “FM” or “Radio FM”. In
this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Frequency” (to change the frequency)
• “Next Station” (to select the next station)
• “Previous Station” (to select the previous station)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Previous Channel” (to select the previous channel)
• “List Channel” (to hear a list of available channels)
• “Select Name” (to say the name of a channel)
• “Radio Menu” (to switch to the radio menu)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
Disc
To switch to the disc mode say “Disc”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
Satellite Radio
To switch to satellite radio mode say “Sat” or “Satellite
Radio”. In this mode, you may say the following commands:
• “Track” (#) (to change the track)
• “Channel Number” (to change the channel by its
spoken number)
• “Main Menu” (to switch to the main menu)
• “Next Channel” (to select the next channel)
115
• “Next Track” (to play the next track)
• “Previous Track” (to play the previous track)
3
116
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Memo
To switch to the voice recorder mode say “Memo”. In this
mode, you may say the following commands:
• “New Memo” (to record a new memo) — During the
recording you may press the VR button to stop recording. You proceed by saying one of the following
commands:
− “Previous” (to play the previous memo)
− “Delete” (to delete a memo)
• “Delete All” (to delete all memos)
System Setup
To switch to system setup say “Setup”. In this mode, you
may say the following commands:
− “Save” (to save the memo)
• “Language German”
− “Continue” (to continue recording)
• “Language Dutch”
− “Delete” (to delete the recording)
• “Language Italian”
• “Play Memos” (to play previously recorded memos)
— During the playback you may press the VR button
to stop playing memos. You proceed by saying one of
the following commands:
• “Language English”
• “Language French”
• “Language Spanish”
− “Repeat” (to repeat a memo)
• “Tutorial”
− “Next” (to play the next memo)
• “Voice Training”
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
NOTE: Keep in mind that you have to press the VR
button first and wait for the beep before speaking the
“Barge In” commands.
Voice Training
For users experiencing difficulty with the system recognizing their voice commands or numbers, uconnect威
phone Voice Training feature may be used.
117
SEATS
Front Seat Adjustment
The adjusting bar is at the front of the seats, near the
floor. Pull the bar up to move the seat to the desired
position.
1. Press the VR button, say “System Setup” and once you
are in that menu then say “Voice Training.” This will train
your own voice to the system and will improve recognition.
2. Repeat the words and phrases when prompted by
uconnect威 phone. For best results, the Voice Training
session should be completed when the vehicle is parked,
engine running, all windows closed, and the blower fan
switched off. This procedure may be repeated with a new
user. The system will adapt to the last trained voice only.
Front Seat Adjustment
3
118
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using body pressure, move forward and rearward on the
seat to be sure the seat adjusters have latched.
WARNING!
Manual Seat Height Adjustment — If Equipped
The driver’s seat height can be raised or lowered by using
the handle on the outboard side of the seat to adjust the
driving position.
• Adjusting a seat while the vehicle is moving is
dangerous. The sudden movement of the seat
could cause you to lose control. The seat belt might
not be properly adjusted and you could be injured.
Adjust the seat only while the vehicle is parked.
• Do not ride with the seatback reclined so that the
shoulder belt is no longer resting against your
chest. In a collision you could slide under the seat
belt and be seriously or even fatally injured. Use
the recliner only when the vehicle is parked.
Seat Height Adjustment
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Manual Lumbar — If Equipped
The lumbar adjustment handle is located on the outboard
side of the driver’s seat. To increase or decrease support,
rotate the handle up or down.
119
Driver’s Seatback Recline
To recline:
1. Lean forward before lifting the handle, then lean back
to the desired position and release the handle.
2. Lift the handle to return the seatback to an upright
position.
Lumbar Adjustment
Reclining Seat
3
120
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Adjustable Head Restraints
Head restraints can reduce the risk of whiplash injury in
the event of impact from the rear. Pull up or push down
on the head restraints so that the upper edge is as high as
practical. To raise the head restraint, pull up on the head
restraint. To lower the head restraint, press the button
and push down on the head restraint.
Head Restraint Adjustment
Heated Seats — If Equipped
This feature heats the front driver and passenger seats.
The heaters provide the same heat level for both cushion
and back. The controls for the front heated seats are
located on the center instrument panel area.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
After turning the ignition ON, you can choose from High,
Low, or Off heat settings. Amber indicator lights in each
switch indicate the level of heat in use. Two indicator
lights will illuminate for High, one for Low, and none for
Off.
Press the switch once to select High-level heating. Press the switch a second time to select
Low-level heating. Press the switch a third time
to shut the heating elements Off.
If High-level heating is selected, the system automatically
switches to Low-level heating and turns one indicator
light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation. It will
turn the heater and the remaining indicator light off after
an additional 30 minutes of continuous operation. If
Low-level heating is selected, the system automatically
turns the heater and the indicator light off after 30 minutes of continuous operation.
121
NOTE: Once a heat setting is selected, heat will be felt
within two to five minutes.
WARNING!
• Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin
because of advanced age, chronic illness, diabetes,
spinal cord injury, medication, alcohol use, exhaustion or other physical condition must exercise
care when using the seat heater. It may cause burns
even at low temperatures, especially if used for
long periods of time.
• Do not place anything on the seat that insulates
against heat, such as a blanket or cushion. This
may cause the seat heater to overheat.
3
122
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat
To fold the front passenger seat, lift the recliner handle to
the full upward position and push the seatback forward
until it rests on the seat cushion.
Front Passenger Seat Folded Flat
Fold-Flat Front Passenger Seat Handle
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
123
Folding Rear Seat
To provide additional storage area, each rear seatback can
be folded forward. Pull the strap forward to move the
seat forward and flat.
3
Rear Seat Folded Flat
Folding Rear Seat
124
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reclining Rear Seat — If Equipped
For additional comfort, pull the strap forward just
enough to release the seatback latch.
Reclining Rear Seat Strap
Then push the seatback to a reclined position, approximately 35 degrees maximum, and release the strap.
WARNING!
• It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area,
inside or outside of a vehicle. In a collision, people
riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed.
• Do not allow people to ride in any area of your
vehicle that is not equipped with seats and seat
belts.
• Be sure that everyone in your vehicle is in a seat
and using a seat belt properly.
TO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD
To open the hood, two latches must be released.
1. Pull the hood release lever located on the left kick
panel.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
125
3
Hood Release Lever
Safety Catch
2. Move the safety catch located under the front edge of
the hood, near the center and raise the hood.
Lift the hood prop rod, clipped to the left side (right side
facing hood) of the engine compartment, to secure the
hood in the open position. Place the hood prop at the
location stamped into the inner hood surface.
126
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
To prevent possible damage, do not slam the hood to
close it. Lower the hood until it is open approximately 8 in (20 cm) and then drop it. This should
secure both latches. Never drive your vehicle unless
the hood is fully closed, with both latches engaged.
WARNING!
If the hood is not fully latched it could fly up when
the vehicle is moving and block your forward vision.
You could have a collision. Be sure all hood latches
are fully latched before driving.
LIGHTS
Multifunction Lever
The multifunction lever controls the operation of the
headlights, parking lights, turn signals, headlight beam
selection, instrument panel light dimming, interior lights,
the passing lights, and fog lights. The multifunction lever
is located on the left side of the steering column.
Headlights, Parking Lights and Instrument Panel
Lights
Turn the end of the multifunction lever to the first detent
for parking light operation. Turn the multifunction lever
to the second detent for headlight operation.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
127
3
Headlight Control
Dimmer Control
To change the brightness of the instrument panel lights,
rotate the center portion of the multifunction lever up or
down.
Lights-on Reminder
If the headlights or parking lights are on after the ignition
is turned OFF, a chime will sound to alert the driver
when the driver’s door is opened.
128
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Fog Lights — If Equipped
The front fog light switch is on the multifunction
lever. To activate the front fog lights, turn on the
parking lights or the low beam headlights and pull
out the end of the multifunction lever.
Fog Light Control
NOTE: The fog lights will only operate with the headlights on low beam. Selecting high beam headlights will
turn off the fog lights.
Turn Signals
Move the multifunction lever up or down and the arrows
on each side of the instrument cluster flash to show
proper operation of the front and rear turn signal lights.
You can signal a lane change by moving the multifunction lever partially up or down without moving beyond
the detent.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
129
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch
Push the multifunction lever away from you to switch
the headlights to high beam. Pull the multifunction lever
toward you to switch the headlights back to low beam.
3
Turn Signal Control
If either light remains on and does not flash, or there is a
very fast flash rate, check for a defective outside light
bulb. If an indicator fails to light when the multifunction
lever is moved, it would suggest that the fuse or indicator
bulb is defective.
High Beam Control
130
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Flash-to-Pass
You can signal another vehicle with your headlights by
lightly pulling the multifunction lever toward you. This
will cause the headlights to turn on at high beam and
remain on until the multifunction lever is released.
NOTE: If the multifunction lever is held in the flash-topass position for more than 30 seconds, the high beams
will shut off. If this occurs, wait 30 seconds for the next
flash-to-pass operation.
Map/Reading Lights
These lights are mounted between the sun visors above
the rearview mirror. Each light is turned on by pressing
the button. Press the button a second time to turn the
light off. The lights also come on when a door is opened
or the dimmer control is turned fully upward, past the
second detent.
Map/Reading Lights
NOTE: The lights will remain on until the switch is
pressed a second time, so be sure they have been turned
off before leaving the vehicle. The lights will turn off
automatically 10 minutes after the ignition is turned OFF
if the door is left open or light is switched on.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Daytime Running Lights (DRL) — If Equipped
The high beam headlights will come on as Daytime
Running Lights (DRL) at DRL intensity, which is a lower
intensity then the normal high beams. The DRL’s will
come on whenever the ignition is ON, the engine is
running, the headlight switch is off, the parking brake is
off, the turn signal is off, and the shift lever is in any
position except for PARK.
Windshield Wiper Operation
Turn the end of the handle to select the desired wiper
speed.
3
NOTE: The DRLs will automatically turn off when the
turn signals or Hazard Warning flashers are in operation
and automatically turn back on when the turn signals
and Hazard Warning flashers are not operating.
WINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS
The wipers and washers are operated by a switch
on the control lever. The lever is located on the
right side of the steering column.
131
Wiper Control
132
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Intermittent Wiper System
Use the intermittent wiper when weather conditions
make a single wiping cycle, with a variable pause between cycles, desirable. Select the delay interval by
turning the end of the lever. Rotate the knob upward
(clockwise) to decrease the delay time and downward
(counterclockwise) to increase the delay time. The delay
can be regulated from a maximum of approximately
18 seconds between cycles, to a cycle every second.
Windshield Washers
To use the washer, pull the control lever toward you and
hold while spray is desired. If the lever is pulled while in
the delay range, the wiper will operate in low speed for
two wipe cycles after the lever is released, and then
resume the intermittent interval previously selected.
If the lever is pulled while in the off position, the wipers
will operate for two wipe cycles, then turn off.
Washer Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Mist Feature
Push down on the wiper control lever to activate a single
wipe to clear the windshield of road mist or spray from
a passing vehicle. As long as the lever is held down, the
wipers will continue to operate.
Mist Control
133
CAUTION!
In cold weather, always turn off the wiper switch and
allow the wipers to return to the park position before
turning off the engine. If the wiper switch is left on
and the wipers freeze to the windshield, damage to
the wiper motor may occur when the vehicle is
restarted.
3
134
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
TILT STEERING COLUMN
To tilt the steering column, push down on the lever below
the multifunction lever. With one hand firmly on the
wheel, move the steering column up or down as desired.
Push the lever back up to lock the column firmly in place.
WARNING!
Tilting the steering column while the vehicle is
moving is dangerous. Without a stable steering column, you could lose control of the vehicle and have
an accident. Adjust the column only while the vehicle is stopped. Be sure it is locked before driving.
ELECTRONIC SPEED CONTROL — IF EQUIPPED
When engaged, Electronic Speed Control takes over the
accelerator operation at speeds greater than 25 mph
(40 km/h). The Electronic Speed Control lever is located
on the right side of the steering wheel.
Tilt Steering Control
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
135
reactivated by pushing the Electronic Speed Control
switch ON/OFF button and resetting the desired vehicle
set speed.
To Activate
Push the ON/OFF button. The CRUISE indicator in the
instrument cluster will illuminate. To turn the system off,
push the ON/OFF button a second time. The CRUISE
indicator will turn off. The system should be turned off
when not in use.
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control Lever
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system has been
designed to shut down if multiple speed control switch
functions are operated simultaneously in order to ensure
proper operation. If this occurs, the system can be
Leaving the Electronic Speed Control system on
when not in use is dangerous. You could accidentally
set the system or cause it to go faster than you want.
You could lose control and have an accident. Always
leave the Electronic Speed Control system off when
you are not using it.
3
136
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To Set At A Desired Speed
When the vehicle has reached the desired speed, press
down on the Electronic Speed Control lever and release.
Release the accelerator and the vehicle will operate at the
selected speed.
NOTE: The vehicle should be traveling at a steady
speed and on level ground before pressing the SET lever.
To Deactivate
A soft tap on the brake pedal, pulling the Electronic
Speed Control lever toward you CANCEL, or normal
braking or pressing the clutch pedal while slowing the
vehicle will deactivate Electronic Speed Control without
erasing the set speed memory. Pressing the ON/OFF
button or turning OFF the ignition switch erases the set
speed memory.
To Resume Speed
To resume a previously set speed, push the RESUME
ACCEL lever up and release. Resume can be used at any
speed above 20 mph (32 km/h).
To Vary The Speed Setting
When the Electronic Speed Control is on, speed can be
increased by pushing up and holding RESUME ACCEL.
Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the
desired speed is reached, and the new speed will be set.
Tapping RESUME ACCEL once will result in a 1 mph
(1.6 km/h) speed increase. Each time the Electronic
Speed Control lever is tapped, speed increases, so that
tapping the Electronic Speed Control lever three times
will increase speed by 3 mph (4.8 km/h), etc.
To decrease speed while the Electronic Speed Control is
on, push down and hold SET DECEL. Release the Electronic Speed Control lever when the desired speed is
reached, and the new speed will be set.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Tapping the SET DECEL button once will result in a
1 mph (1.6 km/h) speed decrease. Each time the button is
tapped, speed decreases.
Manual Transaxle
Pressing the clutch pedal will disengage the speed control. A slight increase in engine RPM before the Electronic
Speed Control disengages is normal.
Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may need to
be shifted into a lower gear to climb hills without speed
loss.
137
WARNING!
Electronic Speed Control can be dangerous where the
system cannot maintain a constant speed. Your vehicle could go too fast for the conditions, and you
could lose control. An accident could be the result.
Do not use Electronic Speed Control in heavy traffic
or on roads that are winding, icy, snow-covered, or
slippery.
To Accelerate For Passing
Press the accelerator as you would normally. When the
pedal is released, the vehicle will return to the set speed.
Using Electronic Speed Control On Hills
NOTE: The Electronic Speed Control system maintains
speed, up and down hills. A slight speed change on
moderate hills is normal.
3
138
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
On steep hills, a greater speed loss or gain may occur so
it may be preferable to drive without Electronic Speed
Control.
GARAGE DOOR OPENER — IF EQUIPPED
HomeLink威 replaces up to three remote controls (handheld transmitters) that operate devices such as garage
door openers, motorized gates, lighting, or home security
systems. The HomeLink威 unit operates off your vehicle’s
battery.
The HomeLink威 buttons that are located in the headliner
or sun visor designate the three different HomeLink威
channels.
HomeLink威 Buttons
NOTE: HomeLink威 is disabled when the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Your motorized door or gate will open and close
while you are training the Universal Transceiver.
Do not train the transceiver if people or pets are in
the path of the door or gate. Only use this transceiver with a garage door opener that has a “stop
and reverse” feature as required by Federal safety
standards. This includes most garage door opener
models manufactured after 1982. Do not use a
garage door opener without these safety features.
Call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for safety information or assistance.
• Vehicle exhaust contains carbon monoxide, a dangerous gas. Do not run your vehicle in the garage
while training the transceiver. Exhaust gas can
cause serious injury or death.
139
Programming HomeLink姞
Before You Begin
If you have not trained any of the HomeLink威 buttons,
erase all channels before you begin training.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes.
It is recommended that a new battery be placed in the
hand-held transmitter of the device being programmed
to HomeLink威 for more efficient training and accurate
transmission of the radio-frequency signal.
Your vehicle should be parked outside of the garage
when programming.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Hold the battery side of the hand-held transmitter
away from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program.
3
140
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Place the hand-held transmitter 1–3 in (3-8 cm) away
from the HomeLink威 button you wish to program while
keeping the indicator light in view.
3. Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen
HomeLink威 button and the hand-held transmitter button
until the HomeLink威 indicator changes from a slow to a
rapidly blinking light, then release both the HomeLink威
and hand-held transmitter buttons.
Watch for the HomeLink威 indicator to change flash rates.
When it changes, it is programmed. It may take up to
30 seconds, or longer in rare cases. The garage door may
open and close while you train.
NOTE:
• Some gate operators and garage door openers may
require you to replace Step 3 with procedures noted in
the “Gate Operator/Canadian Programming” section.
• After training a HomeLink威 channel, if the garage
door does not operate with HomeLink威 and the garage door opener was manufactured after 1995, the
garage door opener may have a rolling code. If so,
proceed to the heading “Programming A Rolling Code
System.”
4. Press and hold the just-trained HomeLink威 button
and observe the indicator light.
If the indicator light stays on constantly, programming is
complete and the garage door (or device) should activate
when the HomeLink威 button is pressed.
If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds, and
then turns to a constant light, continue with programming for a Rolling Code.
5. PROGRAMMING A ROLLING CODE SYSTEM
At the garage door opener motor (in the garage), locate
the “Learn” or “Training” button.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
This can usually be found where the hanging antenna
wire is attached to the garage door opener motor (it is
NOT the button normally used to open and close the
door).
141
6. Firmly press and release the “Learn” or “Training”
button. The name and color of the button may vary by
manufacturer.
NOTE: There are 30 seconds in which to initiate the next
step after the “Learn” button has been pressed.
7. Return to the vehicle and press the programmed
HomeLink威 button twice (holding the button for two
seconds each time). If the device is plugged in and
activates, programming is complete.
If the device does not activate, press the button a third
time (for two seconds) to complete the training.
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
1 — Garage Door Opener
2 — Training Button
To program the remaining two HomeLink威 buttons,
repeat each step for each remaining button. DO NOT
erase the channels.
3
142
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Gate Operator/Canadian Programming
Canadian radio-frequency laws require transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit) after several seconds of
transmission – which may not be long enough for
HomeLink威 to pick up the signal during programming.
Similar to this Canadian law, some U.S. gate operators are
designed to “time-out” in the same manner.
It may be helpful to unplug the device during the cycling
process to prevent possible overheating of the garage
door or gate motor.
If you are having difficulties programming a garage door
opener or a gate operator, replace “Programming
HomeLink威” Step 3 with the following:
3. Continue to press and hold the HomeLink威 button
while you press and release - every two seconds
(“cycle”) your hand-held transmitter until HomeLink威
has successfully accepted the frequency signal. The
indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly when
fully trained.
If you unplugged the device for training, plug it back in
at this time.
Then proceed with Step 4 under “Programming
HomeLink威” earlier in this section.
Using HomeLink姞
To operate, simply press and release the programmed
HomeLink威 button. Activation will now occur for the
trained device (i.e., garage door opener, gate operator,
Security system, entry door lock, home/office lighting,
etc. The hand-held transmitter of the device may also be
used at any time.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Reprogramming A Single HomeLink姞 Button
To re-program a channel that has been previously
trained, follow these steps:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN position.
2. Press and hold the desired HomeLink威 button until
the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds. Do not
release the button.
3. Without releasing the button, proceed with Programming Homelink威 Step 2 and follow all remaining steps.
Security
It is advised to erase all channels before you sell or turn
in your vehicle.
To do this, press and hold the two outside buttons for
20 seconds until the red indicator flashes. Note that all
channels will be erased. Individual channels cannot be
erased.
143
The HomeLink威 Universal Transceiver is disabled when
the Vehicle Security Alarm is active.
Troubleshooting Tips
If you are having trouble programming HomeLink威, here
are some of the most common solutions:
• Replace the battery in the original transmitter.
• Press the “Learn” button on the Garage Door Opener
to complete the training for a Rolling Code.
• Did you unplug the device for training, and remember
to plug it back in?
If you have any problems, or require assistance, please
call toll-free 1–800–355–3515 or, on the Internet at
www.HomeLink.com for information or assistance.
3
144
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
General Information
This device complies with FCC rules Part 15 and Industry
Canada RSS-210. Operation is subject to the following
two conditions:
POWER SUNROOF — IF EQUIPPED
The power sunroof switch is located in the reading light.
1. This device may not cause harmful interference
2. This device must accept any interference that may be
received including interference that may cause undesired
operation
NOTE: The transmitter has been tested and it complies
with FCC and IC rules. Changes or modifications not
expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user’s authority to operate the
device.
The term IC before the certification/registration number
only signifies that Industry Canada technical specifications were met.
Power Sunroof Switch
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• Never leave children in a vehicle, with the key in
the ignition switch. Occupants, particularly unattended children, can become entrapped by the
power sunroof while operating the power sunroof
switch. Such entrapment may result in serious
injury or death.
• In an accident, there is a greater risk of being
thrown from a vehicle with an open sunroof. You
could also be seriously injured or killed. Always
fasten your seat belt properly and make sure all
passengers are properly secured too.
• Do not allow small children to operate the sunroof. Never allow fingers or other body parts, or
any object to project through the sunroof opening.
Injury may result.
145
Opening the Sunroof
Manual Mode
To open the sunroof, press and hold the switch rearward
to full open. Any release of the switch will stop the
movement and the sunroof will remain in a partial open
condition until the switch is pushed and held rearward
again.
Express Mode
Press the switch rearward and release, and the sunroof
will open automatically from any position. The sunroof
will open fully, and stop automatically, this is called
“Express Open”. During Express Open operation any
movement of the sunroof switch will stop the sunroof.
3
146
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Closing the Sunroof
Manual Mode
To close the sunroof, press and hold the switch in the
forward position. Again, any release of the switch will
stop the movement and the sunroof will remain in a
partial close condition until the switch is pushed and
held forward again. To ensure sunroof is fully closed,
press and hold switch until sunroof has completely
stopped moving.
Express Mode
Press the switch forward and release, and the sunroof
will close automatically from any position. The sunroof
will close fully, and stop automatically, this is called
“Express Close”. During Express Close operation, any
movement of the switch will stop the sunroof.
Pinch Protect Feature
This feature will detect an obstruction in the opening of
the sunroof during Express Close operation. If an obstruction in the path of the sunroof is detected, the
sunroof will automatically retract. Remove obstruction
and press the switch forward and release to Express
Close.
Pinch Protect Override
If a known obstruction (ice, debris, etc.) prevents closing,
press the switch forward and hold for two seconds after
the reversal occurs. This allows the sunroof to move
towards the close position.
NOTE: Pinch protection is disabled while the switch is
pressed.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Venting Sunroof — Express
Press and hold the “Vent” button, and the sunroof will
open to the vent position. This is called “Express Vent”,
and will occur regardless of the sunroof position. During
Express Vent operation, any movement of the switch will
stop the sunroof.
Sunshade Operation
The sunshade can be opened manually. However, the
sunshade will open automatically as the sunroof opens.
NOTE: The sunshade cannot be closed if the sunroof is
open.
Wind Buffeting
Wind buffeting can be described as the perception of
pressure on the ears or a helicopter-type sound in the
ears. Your vehicle may exhibit wind buffeting with the
147
windows down, or the sunroof (if equipped) in certain
open or partially open positions. This is a normal occurrence and can be minimized. If the buffeting occurs with
the rear windows open, open the front and rear windows
together to minimize the buffeting. If the buffeting occurs
with the sunroof open, adjust the sunroof opening to
minimize the buffeting or open any window.
Sunroof Maintenance
Use only a nonabrasive cleaner and a soft cloth to clean
the glass panel.
Ignition Off Operation
The sunroof will also operate up to 45 seconds after the
ignition has been turned OFF. The sunroof operation will
be canceled if either of the front doors are opened during
the 45 second time period.
3
148
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
ELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS
There is a standard 12-Volt power outlet located in the
instrument panel for added convenience. This outlet can
power cell phones, electronics and other low power
devices.
Power Outlet 12-Volts
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
149
WARNING!
CAUTION!
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adapter.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use and while driving
the vehicle.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
3
150
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
POWER INVERTER — IF EQUIPPED
A 115-Volt (150-Watt) AC power inverter is located on the
rear of the center console for added convenience. This
outlet can power cellular phones, electronics and other
low power devices requiring power up to 150 Watts.
Certain high-end video games, such as Playstation3 and
XBox360 will exceed this power limit, as will most power
tools. Due to built-in overload protection, the power
outlet will shut down if the power rating is exceeded.
Each device to be powered should be checked first to
make sure it does not exceed the outlet’s 150 Watts
maximum rating.
115-Volt Power Outlet
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
151
WARNING!
CAUTION! (Continued)
To avoid serious injury or death:
• Do not use a three-prong adaptor.
• Do not insert any objects into the receptacles.
• Do not touch with wet hands.
• Close the lid when not in use.
• If this outlet is mishandled, it may cause an
electric shock and failure.
• Accessories that draw higher power (i.e., coolers,
vacuum cleaners, lights, etc.) will degrade the
battery even more quickly. Only use these intermittently and with great caution.
• After the use of high power draw accessories, or
long periods of the vehicle not being started (with
accessories still plugged in), the vehicle must be
driven a sufficient length of time to allow the
generator to recharge the vehicle’s battery.
CAUTION!
• Many accessories that can be plugged in draw
power from the vehicle’s battery, even when not in
use (i.e., cellular phones, etc.). Eventually, if
plugged in long enough, the vehicle’s battery will
discharge sufficiently to degrade battery life
and/or prevent engine starting.
(Continued)
3
152
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CUPHOLDERS
Your vehicle is equipped with four cupholders. There are
two cupholders located in the front.
Rear Cupholders
Front Cupholders
There are two cupholders behind the center console for
rear passengers.
CONSOLE FEATURES
The floor console’s sliding armrest moves forward 3 in
(76.2 mm) to accommodate shorter drivers. The armrest
lid also includes a unique flip pocket for storing a phone
or an MP3 player. The bin inside the console can hold up
to 10 CD jewel cases or other items securely out of sight.
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
153
WARNING!
Do not operate this vehicle with the console compartment lid in the open position. Cell phones, music
players, and other handheld electronic devices
should be stowed while driving. Use of these devices
while driving can cause an accident due to distraction, resulting in death or injury.
Floor Console Flip Pocket
NOTE: The flip pocket and console lid features are
intended to be used in the upright or open position only
while the vehicle is parked. While driving, all handheld
devices should be properly stowed, and the flip pocket
and the console lid should be closed.
3
154
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
CARGO AREA FEATURES
Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging
Flashlight — If Equipped
The dual-function light is mounted in the headliner
above the cargo area to illuminate the cargo area, and
part of it snaps out of the bezel to serve as a flashlight
when needed. The flashlight features two bright LED
light bulbs and is powered by rechargeable lithium
batteries that recharge when snapped back into place for
convenience.
Press in on the flashlight to release it.
Press And Release
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
To operate the flashlight, press the switch once for high,
twice for low, and a third time to return to off.
To install the Cargo Cover, insert either end of the cover
into one of the two notches located in the rear trim
panels. With one of the cover ends installed, push inward
on the opposite end and install it into the same notch
location of the rear trim panel.
Three-Press Switch
Cargo Cover — If Equipped
The cargo area trim panels include two notches for
mounting the available tonneau cover that accommodates the reclining rear seat.
155
Rear Trim Notches
3
156
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
Using the handle, pull the cover toward you and guide
the rear cover posts into the guides located on both sides
of the rear trim panel.
WARNING!
In an accident a cargo cover loose in the vehicle could
cause injury. It could fly around in a sudden stop and
strike someone in the vehicle. Do not store the cargo
cover on the cargo floor or in the passenger compartment. Remove the cover from the vehicle when taken
from its mounting. Do not store in the vehicle.
Removable Load Floor
The cargo area load floor is removable and can be
washed with mild soap and water.
Cargo Cover Guides
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
157
WARNING!
Rear Cargo Area
Cargo Tie-Down Loops
There are two D-rings installed in the cargo area for
securing cargo.
• Cargo tie-down loops are not safe anchors for a
child seat tether strap. In a sudden stop or collision
a loop could pull loose and allow the child seat to
come loose. A child could be badly injured. Use
only the anchors provided for child seat tethers.
• The weight and position of cargo and passengers
can change the vehicle center of gravity and vehicle handling. To avoid loss of control resulting
in personal injury, follow these guidelines for
loading your vehicle:
• Always place cargo evenly on the cargo floor. Put
heavier objects as low and as far forward as
possible.
(Continued)
3
158
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• Place as much cargo as possible in front of the rear
axle. Too much weight or improperly placed
weight over or behind the rear axle can cause the
rear of the vehicle to sway.
• Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the top of
the seatback. This could impair visibility or become a dangerous projectile in a sudden stop or
collision.
• To help protect against personal injury, passengers
should not be seated in the rear cargo area. The
rear cargo space is intended for load carrying
purposes only, not for passengers, who should sit
in seats and use seat belts.
Fold Down Speakers — If Equipped
When the liftgate is open, the speakers can swing down
off the trim panel to face rearward, for tailgating and
other activities.
Fold-Down Speakers
REAR WINDOW FEATURES
Rear Window Wiper/Washer
A switch on the right side of the steering column controls
operation of the rear wiper/washer function. Rotating
the center of the switch forward to the on position will
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
activate the wiper. The rear wiper operates in an intermittent mode only. Rotating the center of the switch all
the way forward will turn on the wash function. The
wash pump will continue to operate as long as the button
is pressed. Upon release, the wipers will cycle two times
before returning to the set position.
159
If the rear wiper is operating when the ignition is turned
OFF, the wiper will automatically return to the “Park”
position if power accessory delay is active. Power accessory delay can be cancelled by opening the door; if this
happens, the rear wiper will stop at its current position
and will not go to “Park”.
Rear Window Defroster
The pushbutton is located on the
bottom right side of the blower
control knob.
Rear Washer Wiper Control
Press this button to turn on the rear window
defroster. An amber light shows that the defroster
is on. The defroster will automatically turn off after
3
160
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
approximately 10 minutes. For an additional five minutes
of operation, press the switch a second time. To prevent
excessive battery drain, use the defroster only when the
engine is operating.
CAUTION!
Use care when washing the inside of the rear window
to prevent damage to heating elements. Use a soft
cloth and a mild washing solution, wiping parallel to
the heating elements. Keep all objects a safe distance
from the window to prevent damaging the heating
elements.
COOLED BEVERAGE STORAGE BIN/GLOVE
COMPARTMENT — IF EQUIPPED
The upper storage bin door swings upward to present the
contents of the long shallow bin that can store items out
of sight. Beneath this bin is the glove compartment. The
large glove compartment door swings downward and
features two levels of storage. The upper bin functions as
a Cooled Beverage Storage Bin, for vehicles equipped
with air conditioning, for storing up to four 20 oz (1 L)
bottles or cans. When desired, cool air enters the compartment to keep the contents cool, depending on ambient temperature and A/C settings.
Glove Compartment And Cooled Beverage Storage
UNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE
161
NOTE: The use of the Cooled Beverage Storage Bin is
for nonperishable beverages only.
To operate the beverage cooler, pull the slide control
about 0.5 in (12 mm) toward the passenger compartment.
This will allow cool air to enter the beverage cooler. To
shut off the beverage cooler when not in use, push the
slide control back 0.5 in (12 mm). This will prevent cool
air from entering the passenger compartment when in
heat mode.
3
Positioning Slide Control
Vehicles without air conditioning can use that space for
storage. The lower bin holds the Owner’s Manual and
other important documents. Another storage bin is located on the outboard side of the steering wheel and can
hold small items like parking cards for easy access.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CONTENTS
䡵 Instrument Panel Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
▫ Average Fuel Economy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Base
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
▫ Distance To Empty (DTE) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184
䡵 Instrument Cluster – Premium . . . . . . . . . . . . 168
▫ Elapsed Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
䡵 Instrument Cluster Descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . 169
▫ Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM) . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
䡵 Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
▫ Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
▫ Oil Change Required . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182
䡵 Sales Code REQ — AM/FM Stereo Radio And
6–Disc CD/DVD Changer (MP3/WMA AUX
Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190
▫ EVIC Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183
▫ Compass/Temperature/Audio . . . . . . . . . . . 184
▫ Operating Instructions - Radio Mode . . . . . . 191
4
164
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Operation Instructions - (Disc Mode For CD
And MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-Video) . . . 198
䡵 Sales Code RES — AM/FM Stereo Radio With
CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208
▫ Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files . . . . . . . 200
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 208
▫ List Button (Disc Mode For
MP3/WMA Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211
▫ Info Button (Disc Mode For MP3/WMA
Play) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 214
䡵 AM/FM/CD/DVD Radio (RER/REN) – If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205
▫ Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 phone
— If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Clock Setting Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206
▫ Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode . . . . 217
䡵 Sales Code RES/RSC — AM/FM Stereo Radio
With CD Player (MP3 AUX Jack) And Sirius
Radio. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217
▫ Operating Instructions — Radio Mode . . . . . 218
▫ Operation Instructions — CD Mode For CD
And MP3 Audio Play . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 223
▫ Notes On Playing MP3 Files . . . . . . . . . . . . 225
▫ List Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
▫ Info Button (CD Mode For MP3 Play) . . . . . . 228
䡵 uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio) — If
Equipped (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU Radios
Only). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ System Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229
▫ Electronic Serial Number/Sirius
Identification Number (ESN/SID) . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Selecting uconnect威 studios (Satellite)
Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230
▫ Satellite Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Reception Quality . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 studios
(Satellite) Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
▫ Operating Instructions — uconnect威 phone
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
165
▫ Operating Instructions — Video
Entertainment System (VES)™
(If Equipped) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
䡵 Remote Sound System Controls —
If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
▫ Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
▫ CD Player . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 CD/DVD Maintenance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
䡵 Radio Operation And Cellular Phones . . . . . . . 236
䡵 Climate Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Manual Heating And Air Conditioning
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
▫ Air Filtration System – If Equipped . . . . . . . 241
▫ Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
4
166
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES
1
2
3
4
- Air Outlet
- Demisters
- Instrument Cluster
- Radio
5
6
7
8
-
Upper Glove Compartment
Lower Glove Compartment/Beverage Cooler – If Equipped
Storage Bins
Climate Controls
9 - Heated Seat Switches – If Equipped
10 - Hazard Warning Flasher
11 - ESP OFF Switch – If Equipped
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
167
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – BASE
4
168
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER – PREMIUM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS
1. Fuel Gauge
When the ignition switch is in the ON position, the
pointer will show the level of fuel remaining in the fuel
tank.
2. Fuel Door Reminder
This indicates that the fuel filler door is located
on the left side of the vehicle.
3. Temperature Gauge
The temperature gauge shows engine coolant temperature. Any reading within the normal range indicates that
the engine cooling system is operating satisfactorily.
169
The gauge pointer will likely indicate a higher temperature when driving in hot weather, up mountain grades,
or when towing a trailer. It should not be allowed to
exceed the upper limits of the normal operating range.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot engine cooling system could
damage your vehicle. If temperature gauge reads “H”
pull over and stop the vehicle. Idle the vehicle with
the air conditioner turned off until the pointer drops
back into the normal range. If the pointer remains on
the “H” and you hear continuous chimes, turn the
engine off immediately, and call an authorized dealership for service.
4
170
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call an authorized dealership for service if your vehicle overheats. If you
decide to look under the hood yourself, see Section 7
of this manual. Follow the warnings under the Cooling System Pressure Cap paragraph.
4. Speedometer
The Speedometer shows the vehicle speed in miles per
hour and/or kilometers per hour (mph/kph).
5. Tachometer
The white area of the scale shows the permissible engine
revolutions-per-minute (RPM x 1000) for each gear range.
Before reaching the red area, ease up on the accelerator to
prevent engine damage.
6. Low Fuel Light
When the fuel level reaches approximately 2.0 gal
(7.8 L) this light will turn on, and remain on until
fuel is added.
7. Charging System Light
This light shows the status of the electrical charging system. The light should come on when the
ignition switch is first turned ON and remain on briefly
as a bulb check. If the light stays on or comes on while
driving, turn off some of the vehicle’s non-essential
electrical devices or increase engine speed (if at idle). If
the charging system light remains on, it means that the
vehicle is experiencing a problem with the charging
system. Obtain SERVICE IMMEDIATELY. See an authorized dealer.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
8. Airbag Warning Light
This light turns on and remains on for seven
seconds as a bulb check, when the ignition
switch is first turned ON. If the light is not on
during starting, stays on, or turns on while
driving, have the system inspected by an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
9. Vehicle Security Light — If Equipped
This light will flash at a fast rate for approximately 16 seconds, when the vehicle security
alarm is arming, and then will flash slowly
until the vehicle is disarmed.
10. Seat Belt Reminder Light
When the ignition switch is first turned ON, this
light will turn on for five to eight seconds as a bulb
check. During the bulb check, if the driver’s seat
171
belt is unbuckled, a chime will sound. After the bulb
check or when driving, if the driver’s seat belt remains
unbuckled, the Seat Belt Reminder Light will illuminate
and the chime will sound. Refer to “Occupant Restraints”
in Section 2 for more information.
11. Oil Pressure Warning Light
This light indicates low engine oil pressure. The
light should turn on momentarily when the engine
is started. If the light turns on while driving, stop the
vehicle and shut off the engine as soon as possible. A
chime will sound for four minutes when this light turns
on.
Do not operate the vehicle until the cause is corrected.
This light does not show how much oil is in the engine.
The engine oil level must be checked under the hood.
4
172
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
12. Engine Temperature Warning Light
This light warns of an overheated engine condition. As temperatures rise and the gauge approaches H , this indicator will illuminate and a
single chime will sound after reaching a set threshold.
Further overheating will cause the temperature gauge to
pass H , the indicator will continuously flash and a
continuous chime will occur until the engine is allowed
to cool.
If the light turns on while driving, safely pull over and
stop the vehicle. If the A/C system is on, turn it off. Also,
shift the transmission into NEUTRAL and idle the vehicle. If the temperature reading does not return to
normal, turn the engine off immediately and call for
service. Refer to “If Your Engine Overheats” in Section 6
for more information.
13. Shift Lever Indicator
This display indicator shows the automatic transmission
shift lever selection.
14. Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
should be checked monthly, when cold and
inflated to the inflation pressure recommended
by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle
placard or tire inflation pressure label. (If your vehicle
has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the
vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label, you should
determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those
tires.)
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has been
equipped with a Tire Pressure Monitoring System
(TPMS) that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when
one or more of your tires is significantly under-inflated.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates, you should stop and check your tires as soon as
possible, and inflate them to the proper pressure. Driving
on a significantly under-inflated tire causes the tire to
overheat and can lead to tire failure. Under-inflation also
reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper
tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to
maintain correct tire pressure, even if under-inflation has
not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS
low tire pressure telltale.
Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS
malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not
operating properly. The TPMS malfunction indicator is
173
combined with the low tire pressure telltale. When the
system detects a malfunction, the telltale will flash for
approximately one minute and then remain continuously
illuminated. This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction exists.
When the malfunction indicator is illuminated, the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure
as intended. TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety
of reasons, including the installation of replacement or
alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always check the
TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more
tires or wheels on your vehicle, to ensure that the
replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS
to continue to function properly.
4
174
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warning have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same size,
type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can cause
sensor damage. Do not use tire sealant from a can, or
balance beads if your vehicle is equipped with a
TPMS, as damage to the sensors may result.
15. Odometer/Trip Odometer
This display indicates the total distance the vehicle has
been driven. Also, the cluster will display, replacing the
odometer/trip odometer, vehicle warning messages such
as: “door/gate ajar”, “gASCAP” (loose gas cap), “LoW
TirE” (display toggles between LoW and TirE when tire
pressure is low), and “Change Oil” message. Loose gas
cap (gASCAP) will be displayed from the Odometer/Trip
Odometer on all models.
NOTE: If the vehicle is equipped with the optional
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) in the instrument cluster, all warnings including “door” and
“gATE” and “Oil Change Required” will only be displayed in the EVIC display. For additional information,
refer to “Electronic Vehicle Information Center — If
Equipped” in this section.
Change Oil Message
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately
12 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate
the next scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil
change indicator system is duty cycle based, which
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
means the engine oil change interval may fluctuate
dependent upon your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position. Do not
start the engine.
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three
times within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
175
16. Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL)
The Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) is part of
an onboard diagnostic system, called OBD, that
monitors engine and automatic transmission control systems. The light will illuminate when the key is in
the ON position, before engine start. If the bulb does not
come on when turning the key from OFF to ON, have the
condition checked promptly.
Certain conditions such as a loose or missing gas cap,
poor fuel quality, etc., may illuminate the MIL after
engine start. The vehicle should be serviced if the light
stays on through several of your typical driving cycles. In
most situations the vehicle will drive normally and will
not require towing.
If the MIL flashes when the engine is running, serious
conditions may exist that could lead to immediate loss of
power or severe catalytic converter damage. The vehicle
should be serviced as soon as possible if this occurs.
4
176
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
17. Cruise Indicator — If Equipped
This indicator shows that the Speed Control
system is ON.
18. Trip/Odometer Display Reset Button
Press this button to change the display from odometer to
either of the two trip odometer settings. Trip A or Trip B
will appear when in the trip odometer mode. Push in and
hold the button for two seconds to reset the trip odometer
to 0 miles (0 km). The odometer must be in Trip mode to
reset.
19. Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) Light
This light informs you of a problem with the
Electronic Throttle Control (ETC) system. If a
problem is detected, the light will come on
while the engine is running. Cycle the ignition
key when the vehicle has completely stopped and the
shift lever is placed in the PARK position. The light
should turn off. If the light remains lit with the engine
running your vehicle will usually be drivable, however,
see an authorized dealer for service as soon as possible. If
the light is flashing when the engine is running, immediate service is required and you may experience reduced
performance, an elevated/rough idle or engine stall and
your vehicle may require towing. The light will come on
when the ignition is first turned ON and remain on
briefly as a bulb check. If the light does not come on
during starting, have the system checked by an authorized dealer.
20. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator
Light/Traction Control System (TCS) Indicator Light
If this indicator light flashes during acceleration, apply as little throttle as possible. While
driving, ease up on the accelerator. Adapt your
speed and driving to the prevailing road conditions, and do not switch off the Electronic Stability
Program (ESP), or Traction Control System (TCS).
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
21. Turn Signal Indicators
The arrow will flash with the exterior turn signal
when the turn signal lever is operated.
If the vehicle electronics sense that the vehicle has
traveled about one mile with the turn signals on, a
continuous chime will sound to alert you to turn the
signals off. If either indicator flashes at a rapid rate, check
for a defective outside light bulb.
22. Front Fog Light Indicator — If Equipped
This light shows when the front fog lights are ON.
23. Electronic Stability Program (ESP) Indicator Light
The malfunction lamp for the Electronic Stability Program (ESP) is combined with Brake
Assist System (BAS). The yellow “ESP/BAS
Warning Lamp” comes on when the ignition
switch is turned to the “ON” position. They should go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
177
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or the
BAS system. If this light remains on after several ignition
cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several miles at
speeds greater than 30 mph (48 km/h), see an authorized
dealer as soon as possible.
24. Anti-Lock Brake (ABS) Light
This light monitors the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS). The light will turn on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position and may
stay on for as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or turns on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
4
178
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
brakes. If the ABS light does not turn on when the
Ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
light inspected by an authorized dealer.
25. High Beam Indicator
This indicator shows that the headlights are on
high beam. Push the multifunction lever forward
to switch the headlights to high beam, and pull toward
yourself (normal position) to return to low beam.
26. Brake Warning Light
This light monitors various brake functions,
including brake fluid level and parking brake
application. If the brake light turns on, it may
indicate that the parking brake is applied, that
the brake fluid level is low, or that there is a problem with
the anti-lock brake system reservoir.
If the light remains on when the parking brake has been
disengaged, and the fluid level is at the full mark on the
master cylinder reservoir, it indicates a possible brake
hydraulic system malfunction or a problem with the
Brake Booster has been detected by the Anti-Lock Brake
System (ABS) / Electronic Stability Program (ESP) system. In this case, the light will remain on until the
condition has been corrected. If the problem is related to
the brake booster, the ABS pump will run when applying
the brake and a brake pedal pulsation may be felt during
each stop.
The dual brake system provides a reserve braking capacity in the event of a failure to a portion of the hydraulic
system. A leak in either half of the dual brake system is
indicated by the Brake Warning Light, which will turn on
when the brake fluid level in the master cylinder has
dropped below a specified level.
The light will remain on until the cause is corrected.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: The light may flash momentarily during sharp
cornering maneuvers, which change fluid level conditions. The vehicle should have service performed, and
the brake fluid level checked.
If brake failure is indicated, immediate repair is necessary.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the red brake light on is
dangerous. Part of the brake system may have failed.
It will take longer to stop the vehicle. You could have
an accident. Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Vehicles equipped with the Anti-Lock Brake System
(ABS), are also equipped with Electronic Brake Force
Distribution (EBD). In the event of an EBD failure, the
Brake Warning Light will turn on along with the ABS
Light. Immediate repair to the ABS system is required.
179
Operation of the Brake Warning Light can be checked by
turning the ignition switch from the OFF position to the
ON position. The light should illuminate for approximately two seconds. The light should then turn off unless
the parking brake is applied or a brake fault is detected.
If the light does not illuminate, have the light inspected
by an authorized dealer.
The light also will turn on when the parking brake is
applied with the ignition switch in the ON position.
NOTE: This light shows only that the parking brake is
applied. It does not show the degree of brake application.
27. Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
Button — If Equipped
Pushing this button will switch between the different
EVIC functions.
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
in this section for more information.
4
180
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
28. Electronic Vehicle Information Center Display — If
Equipped
When the appropriate conditions exist, this display
shows the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
messages.
Refer to the Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
in this section for more information.
ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER
(EVIC) — If Equipped
The Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) features a driver-interactive display that is located in the
instrument cluster.
29. Transmission Temperature Indicator — If Equipped
During sustained high speed driving on hot
days, the automatic transmission oil may become too hot. If this happens, the transmission
overheat indicator light will come on and the
vehicle will slow slightly until the automatic transmission cools down enough to allow a return to the requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating will reoccur as before in a cyclic fashion.
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
181
The EVIC consists of the following:
• Left Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• System Status
• Left Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• Vehicle information warning message displays
• Right Front Turn Signal Light Out (with a single
chime)
• Personal settings (customer programmable features)
• Compass heading
• Outside temperature display
• Trip computer functions
• uconnect威 phone displays — If equipped
• Audio mode display
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
When the appropriate conditions exist, the EVIC displays
the following messages.
• Turn Signal On (with a continuous warning chime
after 1 mile (1.6 km) of distance travelled)
• Right Rear Turn Signal Light Out (with a single chime)
• RKE Battery Low (with a single chime)
• Personal Settings Not Available – Vehicle Not in Park
(automatic transmissions) or vehicle is in motion
(manual transmissions).
• Left/Right Front Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph (1 km/h)
• Left/Right Rear Door Ajar (one or more, with a single
chime if speed is above 1 mph (1 km/h)
• Door(s) Ajar (with a single chime if vehicle is in
motion)
4
182
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Gate Ajar (with a single chime)
• Headlights On
• Key In Ignition
• Check TPM System
• Oil Change Required
Oil Change Required
Your vehicle is equipped with an engine oil change
indicator system. The “Change Oil” message will flash in
the instrument cluster odometer for approximately 5 seconds after a single chime has sounded to indicate the next
scheduled oil change interval. The engine oil change
indicator system is duty cycle based, which means the
engine oil change interval may fluctuate dependent upon
your personal driving style.
Unless reset, this message will continue to display each
time you turn the ignition switch to the ON/RUN
position. To turn off the message temporarily, press and
release the Trip Odometer button on the instrument
cluster. To reset the oil change indicator system (after
performing the scheduled maintenance), refer to the
following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position (do not
start the engine).
2. Fully depress the accelerator pedal slowly three times
within 10 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch to the OFF/LOCK position.
NOTE: If the indicator message illuminates when you
start the vehicle, the oil change indicator system did not
reset. If necessary, repeat this procedure.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
183
• Distance To Empty (DTE)
EVIC Functions
• Elapsed Time
• Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
• Personal Settings
EVIC Button
Press the EVIC button until one of the following functions are displayed on the EVIC:
• Compass/Temperature/Audio
• Average Fuel Economy
To Reset The Display
Pressing and holding the EVIC button once will clear the
function currently being displayed. Reset will only occur
if a resettable function is currently being displayed. To
reset all resettable functions, press and release the EVIC
button a second time within three seconds of resetting the
currently displayed function (reset ALL will be displayed
during this three second window).
4
184
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Compass/Temperature/Audio
Press and release the EVIC button to display one of eight
compass headings to indicate the direction the vehicle is
facing, the outside temperature and the current radio
station.
For additional information regarding the compass, refer
to “Personal Settings (Customer Programmable Features)” in this section.
Average Fuel Economy
Shows the average fuel economy since the last reset.
When the fuel economy is reset, the display will read
“RESET” or show dashes for two seconds. Then, the
history information will be erased, and the averaging will
continue from the last fuel reading before the reset.
Distance To Empty (DTE)
Shows the estimated distance that can be travelled with
the fuel remaining in the tank. This estimated distance is
determined by a weighted average of the instantaneous
and average fuel economy, according to the current fuel
tank level. This is not resettable.
NOTE: Significant changes in driving style or vehicle
loading will greatly affect the actual drivable distance of
the vehicle, regardless of the DTE displayed value.
When the DTE value is less than 30 miles (48 km)
estimated driving distance, the DTE display will change
to a text display of ⬙LOW FUEL⬙. This display will
continue until the vehicle runs out of fuel. Adding a
significant amount of fuel to the vehicle will turn off the
⬙LOW FUEL⬙ text and a new DTE value will be displayed, based on the current values in the DTE calculation and the current fuel tank level.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Elapsed Time
Shows the total elapsed time of travel since the last reset
when the ignition switch is in the ACC position. Elapsed
time will increment when the ignition switch is in the ON
or START position.
Tire Pressure Monitor (TPM)
Refer to “Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS)”
under “Starting and Operating” in Section 5.
Personal Settings (Customer-Programmable
Features)
This allows the driver to set and recall features when the
transmission is in PARK (automatic transmission) or the
vehicle is stopped (manual transmissions).
Press and release the EVIC button until “Personal Settings” is displayed in the EVIC.
185
Use the EVIC button to display one of the following
choices:
Language
When in this display you may select different languages
for all display nomenclature, including the trip functions.
Pressing the EVIC button while in this display selects
English, Espanol, or Francais depending on availability.
As you continue, the displayed information will be
shown in the selected language.
NOTE: uconnect威 language will not change using the
EVIC. Please refer to “Language Selection” under
“uconnect威 phone — If Equipped” in Section 3.
Lock Doors Automatically at 15 MPH (24 km/h)
When ON is selected, all doors lock automatically when
the speed of the vehicle reaches 15 mph (24 km/h). Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
4
186
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Auto Unlock On Exit
When ON is selected all the vehicle’s doors will unlock
when the driver’s door is opened if the vehicle is stopped
(manual transmissions) or the vehicle is stopped and the
transmission is in PARK or NEUTRAL position (automatic transmissions). Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Remote Unlock Driver’s Door 1st
When DRIVER’S DOOR 1ST is selected only the driver’s door will unlock on the first press of the Remote
Keyless Entry (RKE) transmitter UNLOCK button and
require a second press to unlock the remaining locked
doors. When REMOTE UNLOCK ALL DOORS is selected, all of the doors will unlock at the first press of the
RKE transmitter UNLOCK button. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “DRIVER’S
DOOR 1ST” or “ALL DOORS” appears to make your
selection.
Sound Horn with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, a short horn sound will occur when
the RKE transmitter LOCK button is pressed. This feature
may be selected with or without the flash lights on
lock/unlock feature. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until “ON” or “OFF” appears to
make your selection.
Flash Lights with Remote Key Lock
When ON is selected, the front and rear turn signals will
flash when the doors are locked or unlocked using the
RKE transmitter. This feature may be selected with or
without the sound horn on lock feature selected. Press
and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“ON” or “OFF” appears to make your selection.
Delay Turning Headlights Off
When this feature is selected, the driver can choose to
have the headlights remain on for 0, 30, 60, or 90 seconds
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
when exiting the vehicle. Press and hold the EVIC button
when in this display until 0, 30, 60, or 90 appears to make
your selection.
Delay Power Off to Accessories Until Exit
When this feature is selected, the power window
switches, radio, uconnect威 phone, power sunroof, and
power outlets will remain active for up to 10 minutes
after the ignition switch has been turned off. Opening a
vehicle door will cancel this feature. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “OFF”, “45 sec.”,
“5 min.”, or “10 min.” appears to make your selection.
Turn Headlights on with Remote Key Unlock
When this feature is selected, the headlights will activate
and remain on for up to 90 seconds when the doors are
unlocked using the RKE transmitter. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “OFF”, “30 sec.”,
“60 sec.”, or “90 sec.” appears to make your selection.
187
Confirmation of Voice Commands — If Equipped
When ON is selected all voice commands from the
uconnect威 system are confirmed. Press and hold the
EVIC button when in this display until “ON” or “OFF”
appears to make your selection.
Display English or Metric
The EVIC, odometer, and uconnect威 gps system units can
be changed between English and Metric.
Press and hold the EVIC button when in this display until
“US” or “METRIC” appears to make your selection.
Automatic Compass Calibration
When the vehicle is new, the compass may appear erratic
and the EVIC will display “CAL” until the compass is
calibrated. You may also calibrate the compass by completing one or more 360 degree turns (in an area free from
large metal or metallic objects) until the “CAL” message
displayed in the EVIC turns off. The compass will now
function normally.
4
188
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: A good calibration requires a level surface and
an environment free from large metallic objects such as
buildings, bridges, underground cables, railroad tracks,
etc
Compass Variance
Compass Variance is the difference between Magnetic
North and Geographic North. To ensure compass accuracy, the compass variance should be properly set according to the variance map for the zone where the vehicle
will be driven. When properly set, the compass will
automatically account for this difference.
NOTE: Magnetic and battery powered devices, (such as
cell phones, iPod’s, radar detectors, PDA’s and laptops)
should be kept away from the top of the instrument
panel. This is where the compass module is located and
such devices may interfere and cause false compass
readings.
Compass Variance Map
To Set the Variance: with the ignition in the ON position,
with a short button press (less than one second) press and
release the EVIC button several times until you have
displayed
the
“Personal
Settings
(CustomerProgrammable Features)” menu. Once in the “Personal
Settings (Customer-Programmable Features)” menu,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
press and release (less than one second) the EVIC button
several times until “Compass Variance” is highlighted.
The “Compass Variance” message and the current variance zone number will be displayed. To change the zone,
press and hold (longer than two seconds) the EVIC
button to increment the variance one step. Repeat as
necessary, with individual long (for at least one second)
EVIC button presses for each increment, until the desired
variance is achieved. To exit the Variance Programming,
press the EVIC button with a short (less than one second)
button press.
NOTE: The factory default Zone is 8. During programming, the Zone value will wrap around from Zone 15 to
Zone 1.
189
Manual Compass Calibration
If the compass appears erratic or inaccurate, and the
variance has been properly set, you may wish to manually recalibrate the compass. To manually calibrate the
compass:
1. Start the engine and leave the transmission in the
PARK position.
2. Using a quick button press (less than one second),
press and release the EVIC button several times until the
EVIC displays the “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” menu.
3. Once in the “Personal Settings (CustomerProgrammable Features)” menu, press and release (less
than one second) the EVIC button several times until
“Calibrate Compass (Yes)” is displayed.
4. Using a long button press (more than one second)
press the EVIC button, this will place the Compass in
4
190
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
calibration mode. The CAL indicator will come on continuously in the EVIC display to indicate that the compass is now in the calibration mode, and that the vehicle
can now be driven to calibrate.
5. To complete the compass calibration, drive the vehicle
in one or more complete 360–degree circle under 5 mph
(8 km/h) in an area free from power lines and large
metallic objects, until the “CAL” indicator turns off. The
compass will now function normally.
SALES CODE REQ — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
AND 6–DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX
JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
NOTE: A short EVIC button press from the ⬙Calibrate
Compass (Yes)⬙ screen will exit the EVIC CustomerProgrammable Features, and return it to its normal
operating mode.
REQ Radio
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Press the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned ON, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
191
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next listenable station in AM, FM or Satellite (if
equipped) frequencies, pausing for five seconds at each
listenable station before continuing to the next. To stop
the search, press the SCAN button a second time.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect威 phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
4
192
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Phone Button uconnect威 phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save the time change.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button
and selecting the “SET HOME CLOCK” entry. Once in
this display follow the above procedure, starting at
step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in AM, FM
or Satellite (if equipped) frequencies.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
193
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
4
194
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R & B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon is
displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
NOTE: Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll
through the entries. Push the AUDIO/SELECT button to
select an entry and make changes.
• DVD Enter - When the disc is in DVD Menu mode,
selecting DVD Enter will allow you to play the current
highlighted selection. Use the remote control to scroll
up and down the menu (if equipped).
195
• DISC Play/Pause - You can toggle between
playing the DVD and pausing the DVD by
pushing the SELECT button (if equipped).
• DVD Play Options - Selecting the DVD Play Options
will display the following:
• Subtitle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will switch
subtitles to different subtitle languages that are
available on the disc (if equipped).
• Audio Stream – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will
switch to different audio languages (if supported on
the disc) (if equipped).
• Angle – Repeatedly pressing SELECT will change
the viewing angle if supported by the DVD disc (if
equipped).
4
196
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE:
• The available selections for each of the above entries
varies depending upon the disc.
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
• These selections can only be made while playing a
DVD.
• Player Defaults - Selecting this item will allow the
user to scroll through the following items and set
defaults according to customer preference.
• VES™ Power - Allows you to turn VES™ ON and
OFF (if equipped).
• VES™ Lock - Locks out rear VES™ remote controls (if
equipped).
• VES™ CH1/CH2 - Allows the user to change the
mode of either the IR1 or IR2 wireless headphones by
pressing the AUDIO/SELECT button (if equipped).
• Set Home Clock - Pressing the SELECT button allows
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
Menu Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item will allow the user to choose the
default startup DVD menu language (effective only if
language supported by disc). If you want to select a
language not listed, then scroll down and select ⬙other.⬙
Enter the four-digit country code using the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down to select the
number and then push to select.
Audio Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default audio
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
197
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
Aspect Ratio — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between wide
screen, pan scan, and letter box.
Subtitle Language — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose a default subtitle
language (effective only if the language is supported by
the disc). You can select a language not listed by scrolling
down and selecting ⬙other.⬙ Enter the country code using
the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to scroll up and down
to select the number and then push to select.
AutoPlay — If Equipped
When this is set to On and a DVD video is inserted, it will
bypass the DVD menu screen and automatically play the
movie. In some rare cases, the DVD player may not
auto-play the main title. In such cases, use the MENU
button on the remote control to select desired title to play.
Subtitles — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to choose between subtitle
Off or On.
Audio DRC — If Equipped
Selecting this item allows you to limit maximum audio
dynamic range. The default is set to ⬙High,⬙ and under
this setting, dialogues will play at 11 db higher than if the
setting is ⬙Normal.⬙
NOTE: The user will have to set these defaults before
loading a disc. If changes are made to these settings after
a disc is loaded, changes will not be effective. Also, the
defaults are effective only if the disc supports the
customer-preferred settings.
AM and FM Buttons
Press the buttons to select AM or FM mode.
4
198
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET Button — To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this station
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the station will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2 in
both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM, 12 FM,
and 12 Satellite (if equipped) stations to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The stations stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory {12 AM, 12 FM, and 12
Satellite (if equipped) stations}.
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and
MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)
The radio DVD player and many DVD discs are coded by
geographic region. These region codes must match in
order for the disc to play. If the region code for the DVD
disc does not match the region code for the radio DVD
player, it will not play the disc. Customers may take their
vehicle to an authorized dealer to change the region code
of the player a maximum of five times.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
The radio may shut down during extremely hot
conditions. When this occurs, the radio will indicate
“Disc Hot” and shut off until a safe temperature is
reached. This shutdown is necessary to protect the
optics of the DVD player and other radio internal
components.
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
LOAD Button — Loading Compact Disc(s)
Press the LOAD button and the pushbutton with the
corresponding number (1-6) where the CD is being
loaded. The radio will display PLEASE WAIT and
prompt when to INSERT DISC. After the radio displays
⬙INSERT DISC,⬙ insert the CD into the player.
199
Radio display will show ⬙LOADING DISC⬙ when the disc
is loading and “READING DISC” when the radio is
reading the disc.
CAUTION!
This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs only.
The use of other sized discs may damage the CD
player mechanism.
Eject Button — Ejecting Compact Disc(s)
Press the EJECT button and the pushbutton
with the corresponding number (1-6) where the
CD was loaded and the disc will unload and
move to the entrance for easy removal. Radio
display will show ⬙EJECTING DISC⬙ when the disc is
being ejected and prompt the user to remove the disc.
Press and hold the EJECT button for five seconds and all
CDs will be ejected from the radio.
4
200
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
SEEK Button (CD MODE)
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow you to scroll through the tracks faster in
CD and MP3/MWA modes.
SCAN Button (CD MODE)
Press the SCAN button to scan through each track on the
CD currently playing.
TIME Button (CD MODE)
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF (CD MODE)
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released, or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Rewind) button
works in a similar manner.
AM or FM Button (CD MODE)
Switches the radio into the AM or FM radio mode.
Notes On Playing MP3/WMA Files
The radio can play MP3/WMA files; however, acceptable
MP3/WMA file recording media and formats are limited.
When writing MP3/WMA files, pay attention to the
following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3/WMA file recording media supported by the
radio are CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3,WMA, DVD Video,
DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, DVD+RW, and CDDA+MP3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
201
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3/
WMA files). Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep
disc open after writing⬙ are most likely multisession
discs. The use of multisession for CD audio or MP3/
WMA playback may result in longer disc loading times.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
If a disc contains multi-formats, such as CD audio and
MP3/WMA tracks, the radio will only play the MP3/
WMA tracks on that disc.
• Maximum number of directory levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Supported MP3/WMA File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3/WMA
extension as MP3/WMA files. Non-MP3/WMA files
named with the *.MP3/WMA extension may cause playback problems. The radio is designed to recognize the file
as an invalid MP3/WMA and will not play the file.
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
When using the MP3/WMA encoder to compress audio
data to an MP3/WMA file, the bit rate and sampling
• Maximum number of folders: 100
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
4
202
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
frequencies in the following table are supported. In
addition, variable bit rates (VBR) are also supported. The
majority of MP3/WMA files use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate
and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or VBR bit rates.
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
WMA
Specification
WMA
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
160, 128, 144,
24, 22.05, 16
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
48, 64, 96, 128,
44.1 and 48
160, 192 VBR
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for ID3 version 1 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3/WMA Files
When a medium containing MP3/WMA data is loaded,
the radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3/WMA files.
Loading times for playback of MP3/WMA files may be
affected by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
LIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
203
INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3/WMA player, cassette player, or microphone and
utilize the vehicle’s audio system to amplify the source
and play through the vehicle speakers.
4
204
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
SEEK Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SCAN Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
EJECT Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press the TIME button to change the display from
elapsed playing time to time of day. The time of day will
display for five seconds.
RW/FF (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
SET Button (Auxiliary Mode)
No function.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) (If Equipped)
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
For uconnect威 “Voice Recognition System (VR),” refer to
“uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
Operating Instructions - Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
Dolby威
Manufactured under license from Dolby威 Laboratories.
⬙Dolby威⬙ and the double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby威 Laboratories.
Macrovision
This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by U.S. patents and other intellectual property rights. Use of this copyright protection
technology must be authorized by Macrovision, and is
205
intended for home and other limited viewing uses only,
unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision. Reverse
engineering or disassembly is prohibited.
DTS™
⬙DTS™⬙ and ⬙DTS™ 2.0⬙ are trademarks of Digital Theater Systems, Inc.
4
AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO (RER/REN) – IF
EQUIPPED
NOTE: The sales code is located on the lower right side
of the unit’s faceplate.
The REN and RER radios contain a CD/DVD player, USB
port, and a 30-gigabyte hard drive (HDD). Sirius Satellite
Radio is optional. The 6.5 in (16.5 cm) touch screen allows
for easy menu selection.
The RER radio also contains a Global Positioning System
(GPS)-based Navigation system.
206
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Refer to your uconnect威 tunes (REN) or (RER) user’s
manual for detailed operating instructions.
Operating Instructions — Voice Recognition
System (VR) — If Equipped
For the radio, refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in
Section 3.
Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 phone — If
Equipped
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Clock Setting Procedure
uconnect威 gps — RER only
The GPS receiver used in this system is synchronized to
the time data being transmitted by the GPS satellite. The
satellite clock is Greenwich Mean Time (GMT). This is the
worldwide standard for time. This makes the system’s
clock very accurate once the appropriate time zone and
daylight savings information is set.
To Manually Set the Clock — RER/REN
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed.
3. Touch the screen where “User Clock” is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
4. To move the hour forward, touch the screen where the
word “Hour” with the arrow pointing upward is displayed. To move the hour backward, touch the screen
where the word “Hour” with the arrow pointing downward is displayed.
5. To move the minute forward, touch the screen where
the word “Min” with the arrow pointing upward is
displayed. To move the minute backward, touch the
screen where the word “Min” with the arrow pointing
downward is displayed.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
6. To save the new time setting, touch the screen where
the word “Save” is displayed.
Changing Daylight Savings Time
When selected, this feature will display the time of day in
daylight savings time. Proceed as follows to change the
current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Daylight Savings.” Touch the
screen where the words “Daylight Savings” are displayed to change the current setting.
207
Show Time if Radio is Off
When selected, this feature will display the time of day
on the touch screen when the radio is turned off. Proceed
as follows to change the current setting:
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
3. When this feature is on, a check mark will appear in
the box next to the words “Show Time if Radio is Off.”
Touch the screen where the words “Show Time if Radio is
Off” are displayed to change the current setting.
4
208
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Changing the Time Zone
1. Turn on the radio.
2. Touch the screen where the time is displayed. The
clock setting menu will appear on the screen.
SALES CODE RES — AM/FM STEREO RADIO
WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK)
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
3. Touch the screen where the words “Set Time Zone” are
displayed. The time zone selection menu will appear on
the screen.
4. Select a time zone by touching the screen where your
selection appears. If you do not see a time zone that you
want to select, touch the screen where the word “Page” is
displayed to view additional time zones in the menu.
5. Touch the screen where the word “Save” is displayed.
RES Radio
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction, without stopping. Turning
the ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume, and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping, until you release it.
209
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
5. To exit, press any button/knob, or wait five seconds.
4
210
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
AM/FM Button
Press the buttons to select either AM or FM mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
211
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC Button
Pressing the DISC button will allow you to switch from
AM/FM modes to Disc modes.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE For CD And
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
4
212
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4-3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
213
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
RW/FF
Press and hold the FF (Fast Forward) button and the CD
player will begin to fast forward until FF is released, or
RW or another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse)
button works in a similar manner.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
4
214
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the RND button a second time to stop Random
Play.
Notes on Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name, and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
215
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rate.
4
216
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack, which
allows the user to plug in a portable device, such as an
MP3 player, or cassette player, and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
217
SALES CODE RES/RSC — AM/FM STEREO
RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND
SIRIUS RADIO
NOTE: The radio sales code is located on the lower right
side of the radio faceplate.
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will change the mode to
auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
4
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to proper level. If the AUX audio is
not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the AUX
audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume down.
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when ignition is
OFF).
RES/RSC Radio
218
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — Radio Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
Power Switch/Volume Control (Rotary)
Push the ON/VOLUME control knob to turn on the
radio. Push the ON/VOLUME control knob a second
time to turn off the radio.
Electronic Volume Control
The electronic volume control turns continuously (360
degrees) in either direction without stopping. Turning the
ON/VOLUME control knob to the right increases the
volume and to the left decreases it.
When the audio system is turned on, the sound will be
set at the same volume level as last played.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
listenable station in AM/FM mode. Press the right switch
to seek up and the left switch to seek down. The radio
will remain tuned to the new station until you make
another selection. Holding either button will bypass
stations without stopping until you release it.
Voice Recognition System (Radio) — If Equipped
Refer to “Voice Recognition System (VR)” in Section 3.
Voice Recognition Button uconnect威 phone — If
Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
Phone Button uconnect威 phone — If Equipped
Press this button to operate the uconnect威 phone feature
(if equipped). Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
If your vehicle is not equipped with or this feature is not
available on your vehicle, a “Not Equipped With
uconnect” message will display on the radio screen.
TIME Button
Press the TIME button to alternate locations of the time
and frequency display.
Clock Setting Procedure
1. Press and hold the TIME button until the hours blink.
2. Adjust the hours by turning the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob.
3. After adjusting the hours, press the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to set the minutes. The minutes
will begin to blink.
4. Adjust the minutes using the right side TUNE/
SCROLL control knob. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to save time change.
219
5. To exit, press any button/knob or wait five seconds.
The clock can also be set by pressing the SETUP button.
For vehicles equipped with satellite radio, press the
SETUP button, use the TUNE/SCROLL control to select
SET CLOCK, and then follow the above procedure,
starting at Step 2. For vehicles not equipped with satellite
radio, press the SETUP button and then follow the above
procedure, starting at Step 2.
INFO Button
Press the INFO button for an RDS station (one with call
letters displayed). The radio will return a Radio Text
message broadcast from an FM station (FM mode only).
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next frequency in the
direction of the arrows. This feature operates in either
AM or FM frequencies.
4
220
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TUNE Control
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the frequency.
Setting the Tone, Balance, and Fade
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob and BASS
will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control knob to
the right or left to increase or decrease the bass tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a second
time and MID will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
mid-range tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a third
time and TREBLE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL
control knob to the right or left to increase or decrease the
treble tones.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fourth
time and BALANCE will display. Turn the TUNE/
SCROLL control knob to the right or left to adjust the
sound level from the right or left side speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob a fifth time
and FADE will display. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to the left or right to adjust the sound level between
the front and rear speakers.
Push the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to
exit setting tone, balance, and fade.
MUSIC TYPE Button
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected. Many radio stations do not currently broadcast
Music Type information.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button to select the following
format types:
Program Type
No program type or undefined
Adult Hits
Classical
Classic Rock
College
Country
Foreign Language
Information
Jazz
News
Nostalgia
Oldies
16-Digit Character
Display
None
Adlt Hit
Classicl
Cls Rock
College
Country
Language
Inform
Jazz
News
Nostalga
Oldies
Program Type
Personality
Public
Rhythm and Blues
Religious Music
Religious Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rock
Soft Rhythm and Blues
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
16-Digit Character
Display
Persnlty
Public
R&B
Rel Musc
Rel Talk
Rock
Soft
Soft Rck
Soft R&B
Sports
Talk
Top 40
Weather
221
4
222
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type icon
is displayed, the radio will be tuned to the next frequency
station with the same selected Music Type name. The
Music Type function only operates when in the FM
mode.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset station.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select between
the following items:
• Set Clock — Pressing the SELECT button will allow
you to set the clock. Turn the TUNE/SCROLL control
knob to adjust the hours and then press and turn the
TUNE/SCROLL control knob to adjust the minutes.
Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob again to save
changes.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
SET/RND Button — To Set the Pushbutton
Memory
When you are receiving a station that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET/RND
button. The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display
window. Select the button (1 to 6) you wish to lock onto
this station and press and release that button. If a button
is not selected within five seconds after pressing the
SET/RND button, the station will continue to play but
will not be stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second station to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET/RND button twice and SET 2 will show in the
display window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and
SET 2 in both AM and FM. This allows a total of 12 AM
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
and 12 FM stations to be stored into pushbutton memory.
The stations stored in SET 2 memory can be selected by
pressing the pushbutton twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the stations that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 AM and 12 FM
stations).
DISC/AUX Button
Pressing the DISC/AUX button will allow you to switch
from AM/FM modes to DISC/AUX mode.
Operation Instructions — CD MODE for CD and
MP3 Audio Play
NOTE:
• The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
223
• This radio is capable of playing compact discs (CD),
recordable compact discs (CD-R), rewritable compact
discs (CD-RW), compact discs with MP3 tracks and
multisession compact discs with CD and MP3 tracks.
Inserting Compact Disc(s)
Gently insert one CD into the CD player with the CD
label facing up. The CD will automatically be pulled into
the CD player and the CD icon will illuminate on the
radio display. If a CD does not go into the slot more than
1.0 in (2.5 cm), a disc may already be loaded and must be
ejected before a new disc can be loaded.
If you insert a disc with the ignition ON and the radio
ON, the unit will switch from radio to CD mode and
begin to play when you insert the disc. The display will
show the track number, and index time in minutes and
seconds. Play will begin at the start of track 1.
4
224
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
CAUTION!
• This CD player will accept 4–3/4 in (12 cm) discs
only. The use of other sized discs may damage the
CD player mechanism.
• Do not use adhesive labels. These labels can peel
away and jam the player mechanism.
• RES is a single CD player. Do not attempt to insert
a second CD if one is already loaded.
• Dual-media disc types (one side is a DVD, the
other side is a CD) should not be used, and they
can cause damage to the player.
EJECT Button - Ejecting a CD
Press the EJECT button to eject the CD.
If you have ejected a disc and have not removed it within
10 seconds, it will be reloaded. If the CD is not removed,
the radio will reinsert the CD but will not play it.
A disc can be ejected with the radio and ignition OFF.
NOTE: Ejecting with the ignition OFF is not allowed on
convertible or soft-top models (if equipped).
SEEK Button
Press the right SEEK button for the next selection on the
CD. Press the left SEEK button to return to the beginning
of the current selection, or return to the beginning of the
previous selection if the CD is within the first second of
the current selection. Pressing and holding the SEEK
button will allow faster scrolling through the tracks in
CD and MP3 modes.
TIME Button
Press this button to change the display from a large CD
playing time display to a small CD playing time display.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
225
RW/FF
Press and hold FF (Fast Forward) and the CD player will
begin to fast forward until FF is released or RW or
another CD button is pressed. The RW (Reverse) button
works in a similar manner.
Notes On Playing MP3 Files
The radio can play MP3 files; however, acceptable MP3
file recording media and formats are limited. When
writing MP3 files, pay attention to the following restrictions.
AM/FM Button
Press the button to select either AM or FM mode.
Supported Media (Disc Types)
The MP3 file recording media supported by the radio are
CDDA, CD-R, CD-RW, MP3, and CDDA+MP3.
SET/RND Button (Random Play Button)
Press this button while the CD is playing to activate
Random Play. This feature plays the selections on the
compact disc in random order to provide an interesting
change of pace.
Press the right SEEK button to move to the next randomly selected track.
Press the SET/RND button a second time to stop Random Play.
Supported Medium Formats (File Systems)
The medium formats supported by the radio are ISO 9660
Level 1 and Level 2 and includes the Joliet extension.
When reading discs recorded using formats other than
ISO 9660 Level 1 and Level 2, the radio may fail to read
files properly and may be unable to play the file normally. UDF and Apple HFS formats are not supported.
The radio uses the following limits for file systems:
• Maximum number of folder levels: 8
4
226
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
• Maximum number of files: 255
• Maximum number of folders. (The radio display of file
names and folder names is limited. For large numbers
of files and/or folders, the radio may be unable to
display the file name and folder name and will assign
a number instead. With a maximum number of files,
exceeding 20 folders will result in this display. With
200 files, exceeding 50 folders will result in this
display.)
• Maximum number of characters in file/folder names:
• Level 1: 12 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
• Level 2: 31 (including a separator ⬙.⬙ and a threecharacter extension)
Multisession disc formats are supported by the radio.
Multisession discs may contain combinations of normal
CD audio tracks and computer files (including MP3 files).
Discs created with an option such as ⬙keep disc open after
writing⬙ are most likely multisession discs. The use of
multisession for CD audio or MP3 playback may result in
longer disc loading times.
Supported MP3 File Formats
The radio will recognize only files with the *.MP3 extension as MP3 files. Non-MP3 files named with the *.MP3
extension may cause playback problems. The radio is
designed to recognize the file as an invalid MP3 and will
not play the file.
When using the MP3 encoder to compress audio data to
an MP3 file, the bit rate and sampling frequencies in the
following table are supported. In addition, variable bit
rates (VBR) are also supported. The majority of MP3 files
use a 44.1 kHz sampling rate and a 192, 160, 128, 96 or
VBR bit rates.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
MPEG
Specification
MPEG-1 Audio
Layer 3
MPEG-2 Audio
Layer 3
Sampling
Bit Rate (kbps)
Frequency (kHz)
320, 256, 224,
192, 160, 128,
48, 44.1, 32
112, 96, 80, 64,
56, 48, 40, 32
160, 128, 144,
112, 96, 80, 64,
24, 22.05, 16
56, 48, 40, 32, 24,
16, 8
ID3 Tag information for artist, song title, and album title
are supported for version 1 ID3 tags. ID3 version 2 is not
supported by the radios.
Playlist files are not supported. MP3 Pro files are not
supported.
227
Playback of MP3 Files
When a medium containing MP3 data is loaded, the
radio checks all files on the medium. If the medium
contains a lot of folders or files, the radio will take more
time to start playing the MP3 files.
Loading times for playback of MP3 files may be affected
by the following:
• Media - CD-RW media may take longer to load than
CD-R media
• Medium formats - Multisession discs may take longer
to load than non-multisession discs
• Number of files and folders - Loading times will
increase with more files and folders
To increase the speed of disc loading, it is recommended
to use CD-R media and single-session discs. To create a
single-session disc, enable the “Disc at Once” option
before writing to the disc.
4
228
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
LIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the LIST button will bring up a list of all folders
on the disc. Scrolling up or down the list is done by
turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob. Selecting a
folder by pressing the TUNE/SCROLL control knob will
begin playing the files contained in that folder (or the
next folder in sequence if the selection does not contain
playable files).
The folder list will time out after five seconds.
INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)
Pressing the INFO button repeatedly will scroll through
the following TAG information: Song Title, Artist, File
Name, and Folder Name (if available).
Press the INFO button once more to return to ⬙elapsed
time⬙ priority mode.
Press and hold the INFO button for three seconds or
more and the radio will display song titles for each file.
Press and hold the INFO button again for three seconds
to return to ⬙elapsed time⬙ display.
Operation Instructions - Auxiliary Mode
The auxiliary (AUX) jack is an audio input jack which
allows the user to plug in a portable device such as an
MP3 player or cassette player and utilize the vehicle’s
audio system to amplify the source and play through the
vehicle speakers.
Pressing the AUX button will change the mode to auxiliary device if the AUX jack is connected.
NOTE: The AUX device must be turned on and the
device’s volume set to the proper level. If the AUX audio
is not loud enough, turn the device’s volume up. If the
AUX audio sounds distorted, turn the device’s volume
down.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
TIME Button (Auxiliary Mode)
Press this button to change the display to time of day. The
time of day will display for five seconds (when the
ignition is OFF).
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions - uconnect威 studios
(Satellite Radio) (If Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 studios (Satellite Radio)” in this
section.
uconnect姞 studios (SATELLITE RADIO) — IF
EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS
ONLY)
Satellite radio uses direct satellite-to-receiver broadcasting technology to provide clear digital sound, coast to
coast. The subscription service provider is Sirius Satellite
229
Radio. This service offers over 130 channels of music,
sports, news, entertainment, and programming for children, directly from its satellites and broadcasting studios.
NOTE: Sirius service is not available in Hawaii and has
limited coverage in Alaska.
System Activation
Sirius Satellite Radio service is pre-activated and you
may begin listening immediately to the one year of audio
service that is included with the factory-installed satellite
radio system in your vehicle. Sirius will supply a welcome kit that contains general information, including
how to setup your on-line listening account at no additional charge. For further information, call the toll-free
number 888-539-7474, or visit the Sirius web site at
www.sirius.com, or at www.siriuscanada.ca for Canadian residents.
4
230
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID)
Please have the following information available when
calling:
1. The Electronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification
Number (ESN/SID).
2. Your Vehicle Identification Number.
To access the ESN/SID, refer to the following steps:
ESN/SID Access With REQ/RES Radios
With the ignition switch in the ON/RUN or ACC position and the radio on, press the SETUP button and scroll
using the TUNE/SCROLL control knob until Sirius ID is
selected. Press the TUNE/SCROLL control knob and the
Sirius ID number will display. The Sirius ID number
display will time out in two minutes. Press any button on
the radio to exit this screen.
ESN/SID Access With REN/RER Radios
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, touch the SUBSCRIPTION tab on the touch screen.
All the ESNs that apply to your vehicle will display.
ESN/SID Access With REU Radio
While in SAT mode, press the MENU button on the radio
faceplate.
Next, turn the knob surrounding the joystick in the center
of the radio to scroll to Subscription, and then press and
release the joystick. All of the ESNs that apply to your
vehicle will display.
Selecting uconnect姞 studios (Satellite) Mode
Press the SAT button until ⬙SAT⬙ appears in the display. A
CD may remain in the radio while in the Satellite radio
mode.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Satellite Antenna
To ensure optimum reception, do not place items on the
roof around the rooftop antenna location or strap items to
the trunk lid around the trunk lid antenna (if equipped).
Metal objects placed within the line of sight of the
antenna will cause decreased performance. Larger luggage items such as bikes should be placed as far rearward
as possible, within the loading design of the rack. Do not
place items directly on or above the antenna.
Reception Quality
Satellite reception may be interrupted due to one of the
following reasons:
• The vehicle is parked in an underground parking
structure or under a physical obstacle.
• Dense tree coverage may interrupt reception in the
form of short audio mutes.
• Driving under wide bridges or along tall buildings can
cause intermittent reception.
231
• Placing objects over or too close to the antenna can
cause signal blockage.
Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 studios
(Satellite) Mode
NOTE: The ignition switch must be in the ON or ACC
position to operate the radio.
SEEK Buttons
Press and release the SEEK buttons to search for the next
channel in Satellite mode. Press the right switch to seek
up and the left switch to seek down. The radio will
remain tuned to the new channel until you make another
selection. Holding either button will bypass channels
without stopping until you release it.
SCAN Button (When Equipped)
Pressing the SCAN button causes the tuner to search for
the next channel, pausing for eight seconds before continuing to the next. To stop the search, press the SCAN
button a second time.
4
232
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
INFO Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will cycle the display information between Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Also, pressing and holding the INFO button for an
additional three seconds will make the radio display the
song title all of the time (press and hold again to return to
normal display).
INFO Button — REU Radio
Pressing the INFO button will display information about
Artist, Song Title, and Composer (if available). Pressing
the INFO button again will close the INFO screen.
RW/FF
Pressing the RW (Rewind) or FF (Fast Forward) buttons
causes the tuner to search for the next channel in the
direction of the arrows.
TUNE Control (Rotary)
Turn the rotary TUNE/SCROLL control knob clockwise
to increase or counterclockwise to decrease the channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — Except REU Radio
Pressing this button once will turn on the Music Type
mode for five seconds. Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button
or turning the TUNE/SCROLL control knob within five
seconds will allow the program format type to be selected.
Toggle the MUSIC TYPE button again to select the music
type.
By pressing the SEEK button when the Music Type
function is active, the radio will be tuned to the next
channel with the same selected Music Type name.
If a preset button is activated while in the Music Type
(Program Type) mode, the Music Type mode will be
exited and the radio will tune to the preset channel.
MUSIC TYPE Button — REU Radio
Pressing this button provides a Music Type list from
which you can make a selection. Once a selection is
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
made, you can seek up or down or scan the channels and
the radio will tune to the next station matching the
selected format. There is no time-out for this screen.
Pressing the MUSIC TYPE button again will close the
Music Type screen. Once closed, seek up, seek down, and
scan will no longer be based on your selection.
SETUP Button
Pressing the SETUP button allows you to select the
following items:
• Display Sirius ID number — Press the AUDIO/
SELECT button to display the Sirius ID number. This
number is used to activate, deactivate, or change the
Sirius subscription.
SET Button – To Set the Pushbutton Memory
When you are receiving a channel that you wish to
commit to pushbutton memory, press the SET button.
The symbol SET 1 will now show in the display window.
Select the button (1-6) you wish to lock onto this channel
233
and press and release that button. If a button is not
selected within five seconds after pressing the SET button, the channel will continue to play but will not be
stored into pushbutton memory.
You may add a second channel to each pushbutton by
repeating the above procedure with this exception: Press
the SET button twice and SET 2 will show in the display
window. Each button can be set for SET 1 and SET 2. This
allows a total of 12 Satellite channels to be stored into
pushbutton memory. The channels stored in SET 2
memory can be selected by pressing the pushbutton
twice.
Every time a preset button is used, a corresponding
button number will display.
Buttons 1 - 6
These buttons tune the radio to the channels that you
commit to pushbutton memory (12 Satellite stations).
4
234
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Instructions — uconnect姞 phone (If
Equipped)
Refer to “uconnect威 phone” in Section 3.
Operating Instructions — Video Entertainment
System (VES)™ (If Equipped)
Refer to separate “Video Entertainment System (VES)™
Guide.”
REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS — IF
EQUIPPED
The remote sound system controls are located on the rear
surface of the steering wheel. Reach behind the wheel to
access the switches.
Remote Sound System Controls (Back View of Steering
Wheel)
The right-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. Pressing the top of the switch
will increase the volume and pressing the bottom of the
switch will decrease the volume.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
The button located in the center of the right-hand control
will switch modes to Radio or CD.
The left-hand control is a rocker type switch with a
pushbutton in the center. The function of the left-hand
control is different depending on which mode you are in.
The following describes the left-hand control operation in
each mode.
Radio Operation
Press the top of the switch to SEEK up for the next
listenable station. Press the bottom of the switch to SEEK
down for the next listenable station.
The button located in the center of the left-hand control
will tune to the next preset station that you have programmed in the radio preset pushbuttons.
CD Player
Press the top of the switch once to go to the next track on
the CD. Press the bottom of the switch once to go to the
235
beginning of the current track or to the beginning of the
previous track, if it is within one second after the current
track begins to play.
If you press the switch up or down twice it plays the
second track, three times, it will play the third, etc.
The button in the center of the left-hand switch changes
CD’s on the 6–Disc in-dash CD changer radio. This
button does not function for all other radios.
CD/DVD MAINTENANCE
To keep a CD/DVD in good condition, take the following
precautions:
1. Handle the disc by its edge; avoid touching the
surface.
2. If the disc is stained, clean the surface with a soft cloth,
wiping from center to edge.
4
236
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
3. Do not apply paper or tape to the disc; avoid scratching the disc.
4. Do not use solvents such as benzene, thinner, cleaners,
or antistatic sprays.
5. Store the disc in its case after playing.
6. Do not expose the disc to direct sunlight.
7. Do not store the disc where temperatures may become
too high.
NOTE: If you experience difficulty in playing a particular disc, it may be damaged (i.e. scratched, reflective
coating removed, a hair, moisture or dew on the disc)
oversized, or have protection encoding. Try a known
good disc before considering disc player service.
RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES
Under certain conditions, the cellular phone being on in
your vehicle can cause erratic or noisy performance from
your radio. This condition may be lessened or eliminated
by relocating the cellular phone antenna. This condition
is not harmful to the radio. If your radio performance
does not satisfactorily “clear” by the repositioning of the
antenna, it is recommended that the radio volume be
turned down or off during cellular phone operation.
CLIMATE CONTROLS
Manual Heating and Air Conditioning System
The Manual Heating and Air Conditioning system allows
you to balance the temperature, amount, and direction of
air circulating throughout the vehicle. The controls are
located on the instrument panel, below the radio.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
237
Mode Control (Air Direction)
The mode control allows you to
choose from several patterns of air
distribution as identified by the
symbols.
4
Climate Control
The air conditioning system of your vehicle contains
R-134a, a refrigerant that does not deplete the ozone layer
in the upper atmosphere.
The controls are as follows:
Panel
Air is directed through the outlets in the instrument
panel. These outlets can be adjusted to direct air
flow.
Bi-Level
Air is directed through the panel and floor outlets.
238
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: There is a difference in temperature between the
upper and lower outlets for added comfort. The warmer
air goes to the floor outlets. This feature gives improved
comfort during sunny but cool conditions.
Floor
Air is directed through the floor outlets and side
window demister outlets with a small amount
through the defrost outlet.
Mix
Air is directed through the floor, defrost and side
window demister outlets. This setting works best in
cold or snowy conditions that require extra heat at
the windshield. This setting is good for maintaining
comfort while reducing moisture on the windshield.
Defrost
Air is directed through the windshield and side
window demister outlets. Use this mode with
maximum fan and temperature settings for best windshield and side window defrosting.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor operates in
both Mix and Defrost modes even if the Air Conditioning
Snowflake button is not pressed. This dehumidifies the
air to help dry the windshield. To improve fuel economy,
use these modes only when necessary.
Air Outlets
The airflow from each of the instrument panel outlets can
be adjusted for direction and turned ON or OFF to
control air flow.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
NOTE: For maximum airflow to the rear seat passengers, the center instrument panel outlets can be aimed, so
that the left center outlet is directed toward the right rear
passenger and the right center outlet is directed toward
the left rear passenger.
Fan Control
Use this control to regulate the
amount of air forced through the
system in any mode you select.
The fan speed increases as you
move the control from the left
(OFF) to the right position.
NOTE: For vehicles equipped with Remote Start, the
climate controls will not function during Remote Start
operation if the fan control is left in the “O” (Off)
position.
239
Temperature Control
Use this control to regulate the
temperature of the air inside the
passenger compartment. The blue
area of the scale indicates cooler
temperatures while the red area
indicates warmer temperatures.
NOTE: If your air conditioning performance seems
lower than expected, check the front of the A/C condenser, located in front of the radiator, for an accumulation of dirt or insects. Clean with a gentle water spray
from behind the radiator and through the condenser.
Fabric front fascia protectors may reduce air flow to the
condenser, reducing air conditioning performance.
4
240
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Circulation Control
Use this button to choose between
outside air intake or recirculation
of the air inside the vehicle. A
light will illuminate when you are
in recirculate mode. Only use the
recirculate mode to temporarily
block out any outside odors,
smoke, or dust and to cool the
interior rapidly upon initial start
up in very hot or humid weather.
NOTE: Continuous use of the recirculate mode may
make the inside air stuffy and window fogging may
occur. Extended use of this mode is not recommended.
In cold or damp weather, the use of the Recirculate
position will cause windows to fog on the inside because
of moisture build up inside the vehicle. For maximum
defogging, select the Outside Air position.
NOTE: Recirculation Mode will not operate in floor, mix
or defrost modes.
Air Conditioning (Normal)
Use this button to engage the Air
Conditioning. A light will illuminate when the Air Conditioning
System is engaged.
NOTE: The air conditioning compressor will not engage
until the engine has been running for about 10 seconds.
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Air Conditioning (MAX A/C)
For maximum cooling select the
air direction to either the Panel or
Bi-Level position using the mode
control. Press the A/C button and
the recirculation button so that
both lights are illuminated and set
the temperature control to its
coolest setting.
NOTE:
• Recirculation Mode will not operate in Floor, Mix or
Defrost modes.
• See “Circulation Control” in this section, for proper or
extended use of this position.
241
Air Filtration System – If Equipped
An air filter is included in the optional Security Group.
The filter media includes a particle filtration layer. The
filter will reduce, but not eliminate, diesel and agricultural smells. The filter acts only on air coming from
outside the vehicle; it does not filter air inside the
passenger compartment.. The air filter change interval
coincides with engine oil and filter change intervals. As
with oil changes, the interval is shorter for heavy duty
service or dusty conditions. Refer to “Maintenance
Schedule” in Section 7. See your authorized dealer for
service.
4
242
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Operating Tips
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Window Fogging
Vehicle side windows tend to fog on the inside in mild
rainy or humid weather. To clear the windows, set mode
to the mix or defrost position. Direct the panel outlets
toward the side windows. Do not use recirculate without
A/C for long periods as fogging may occur.
Interior fogging on the windshield can be quickly removed by using the defrost position.
If the fogging problem persists, clean the inside window
surfaces. The cause of undue fogging may be dirt collecting on the inside surface of the glass
NOTE: In cold weather, the use of the recirculate position will cause windows to fog on the
inside because of moisture build up inside the
vehicle. Moisture and ice can also accumulate
on the inside of the sheet metal and may result in
243
headliner and/or electronic component damage. For
maximum defogging, press the recirculation button until
recirculate is off.
Summer Operation
Air conditioned vehicles must be protected with a highquality antifreeze coolant to provide proper corrosion
protection and to raise the boiling point of the coolant for
protection against overheating. A 50% concentration is
recommended.
Outside Air Intake
When operating the system during the winter months,
make sure the air intake, directly in front of the windshield, is free of ice, slush, snow or other obstructions
such as leaves. Leaves collected in the air-intake plenum
may reduce air flow and plug the plenum water drains.
The blower air will heat faster in cold weather if you use
only a low blower speed for the first few minutes of
vehicle operation.
4
244
UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL
Side Window Demisters
A side window demister outlet is at each end of the
instrument panel. These nonadjustable outlets direct air
toward the side windows when the system is in either the
FLOOR, MIX, or DEFROST mode. The air is directed at
the area of the windows through which you view the
outside mirrors.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CONTENTS
䡵 Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
䡵 Manual Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Manual Transmission — If Equipped . . . . . . 249
▫ 5–Speed Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Automatic Transmission — If Equipped . . . . 249
▫ Recommended Shift Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Normal Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
▫ Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
▫ Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F
Or ⫺29°C) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
䡵 Automatic Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 253
▫ If Engine Fails To Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
▫ After Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 251
▫ Brake/Transmission Interlock System . . . . . . 254
▫ Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock
System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
▫ Gear Ranges . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
5
246
STARTING AND OPERATING
䡵 AutoStick威 — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
▫ Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258
䡵 Driving On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Acceleration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
▫ Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
䡵 Driving Through Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Flowing/Rising Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
▫ Shallow Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
䡵 Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262
▫ Power Steering Fluid Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
䡵 Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
䡵 Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If
Equipped . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
䡵 Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . 268
▫ Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Brake Assist System (BAS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
▫ Traction Control System (TCS) . . . . . . . . . . . 270
▫ Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . 270
䡵 Tire Safety Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
▫ Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . 278
▫ Tire Loading And Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . 279
䡵 Tires — General Information
. . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
▫ Tire Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
STARTING AND OPERATING
247
▫ Tire Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
▫ Base System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 295
▫ Tire Pressures For High Speed Operation . . . 285
▫ Premium System — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 297
▫ Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
▫ General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped . . . . . . . 286
䡵 Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
▫ Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped . . . . . . . . 287
▫ Reformulated Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Tire Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
▫ Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
▫ E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles . . . . . . 302
▫ Life Of Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
▫ MMT In Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 303
▫ Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
▫ Materials Added To Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Tire Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Fuel System Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
䡵 Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
▫ Carbon Monoxide Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 Tire Rotation Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . 292
䡵 Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
䡵 Tire Pressure Monitoring System (TPMS) . . . . . 293
▫ Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
5
248
STARTING AND OPERATING
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 307
䡵 Vehicle Loading
▫ Trailer And Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307
▫ Towing Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
▫ Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
▫ Towing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
䡵 Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
䡵 Recreational Towing
(Behind Motorhome, Etc.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
▫ Common Towing Definitions . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
▫ Installing A Trailer Hitch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Trailer Hitch Classification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
▫ Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
▫ Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle
(Flat Towing With All Four Wheels On The
Ground) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING PROCEDURES
Before starting your vehicle, adjust your seat, adjust both
inside and outside mirrors, and fasten your seat belts.
WARNING!
Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in the
ignition. A child could operate power windows,
other controls, or move the vehicle.
Manual Transmission — If Equipped
Before starting the engine fully apply the parking brake,
press the clutch pedal to the floor, and place the shift
lever in NEUTRAL.
249
NOTE:
• The engine will not start unless the clutch pedal is
pressed to the floor.
• If the key will not turn and the steering wheel is
locked, rotate the wheel in either direction to relieve
pressure on the locking mechanism and then turn the
key.
Automatic Transmission — If Equipped
The shift lever must be in the PARK or NEUTRAL
position before you can start the engine. Apply the brakes
before shifting to any driving gear.
NOTE: You must press the brake pedal before shifting
out of PARK.
Normal Starting
Normal starting of either a cold or a warm engine does
not require pumping or depressing the accelerator pedal.
Simply turn the ignition switch to the START position
5
250
STARTING AND OPERATING
and release when the engine starts. If the engine fails to
start within 15 seconds, turn the ignition switch to the
OFF position, wait 10 to 15 seconds, then repeat the
normal starting procedure.
Extremely Cold Weather (Below ⫺20°F Or ⫺29°C)
To ensure reliable starting at these temperatures, use of
an externally powered electric engine block heater (available from your authorized dealer) is recommended.
WARNING!
If Engine Fails to Start
If the engine fails to start after you have followed the
“Normal Starting” procedure, it may be flooded. Push
the accelerator pedal all the way to the floor and hold it
there. Crank the engine for no more than 15 seconds. This
should clear any excess fuel in case the engine is flooded.
Leave the ignition key in the ON position, release the
accelerator pedal and repeat the “Normal Starting” procedure.
Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get it
started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic transaxle cannot be started this way. Unburned fuel could
enter the catalytic converter and once the engine has
started, ignite and damage the converter and vehicle.
If the vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow the procedure carefully. See Section 6
of this manual for jump-starting instructions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Never pour fuel or other flammable liquid into the
throttle body air inlet opening in an attempt to start
the vehicle. This could result in flash fire causing
serious personal injury.
CAUTION!
To prevent damage to the starter, do not crank the
engine for more than 15 seconds at a time. Wait 10 to
15 seconds before trying again.
After Starting
The idle speed will automatically decrease as the engine
warms up.
251
MANUAL TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
5–Speed Manual Transaxle
WARNING!
You or others could be injured if you leave the
vehicle unattended without having the parking
brake fully applied. The parking brake should always be applied when the driver is not in the vehicle,
especially on an incline.
5
252
STARTING AND OPERATING
Fully depress the clutch pedal before you shift gears. As
you release the clutch pedal, lightly depress the accelerator pedal.
Use each gear in numerical order, do not skip a gear. Be
sure the transaxle is in 1st gear, (not 3rd), when starting
from a standing position. Damage to the clutch can result
from starting in 3rd gear.
For most city driving, you will find it easier to use only
the lower gears. For steady highway driving with light
accelerations, 5th gear is recommended.
Never drive with your foot resting on the clutch pedal,
and never try to hold the vehicle on a hill with the clutch
pedal partially engaged. This will cause abnormal wear
on the clutch.
Never shift into REVERSE until the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
Shift Pattern
NOTE: During cold weather, until the transaxle lubricant is warm, you may experience slightly higher shift
efforts. This is normal and not harmful to the transaxle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Recommended Shift Speeds
To use your manual transaxle for optimal fuel economy,
it should be upshifted as listed in the following table.
Manual Transaxle Recommended Shift Speeds
Units in mph (km/h)
AccelEngine
eration 1 to 2 2 to 3
3 to 4
4 to 5
Size
Rate
All En- Accel 14 (23) 23 (37) 29 (47) 45 (72)
gines
Cruise 12 (19) 18 (29) 25 (40) 32 (52)
Downshifting
Proper downshifting will improve fuel economy and
prolong engine life.
253
CAUTION!
If you skip more than one gear while downshifting
or downshift at too high a vehicle speed, you could
damage the engine, transmission, or clutch.
To maintain a safe speed and prolong brake life, shift
down to 2nd or 1st gear when descending a steep grade.
When turning a corner or driving up a steep grade,
downshift early so that the engine will not be
overburdened.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE — IF EQUIPPED
NOTE: The Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle
(CVT) changes ratios in a continuous manner. This may
sometimes ⬙feel⬙ as if it is slipping, but this is normal and
does not harm anything.
5
254
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING!
Damage to the transaxle may occur if the following
precautions are not observed:
• Shift into PARK only after the vehicle has come to
a complete stop.
• Shift into or out of REVERSE only after the
vehicle has come to a complete stop and the engine
is at idle speed.
• Do not shift from REVERSE, PARK, or NEUTRAL
into any forward gear when the engine is above
idle speed.
• Before shifting into any gear, make sure your foot
is firmly on the brake pedal.
It is dangerous to move the shift lever out of PARK or
NEUTRAL if the engine speed is higher than idle
speed. If your foot is not firmly on the brake pedal,
the vehicle could accelerate quickly forward or in
reverse. You could lose control of the vehicle and hit
someone or something. Only shift into gear when the
engine is idling normally and when your right foot is
firmly on the brake pedal.
NOTE: You MUST press and hold the brake pedal down
while shifting out of PARK.
Brake/Transmission Interlock System
This system prevents you from moving the shift lever out
of PARK and into any gear unless the brake pedal is
pressed. This system is active only while the ignition
switch is in the ON or ACC position. Always depress the
brake pedal first, before moving the shift lever out of
PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the transaxle will not
shift out of PARK. Battery power is required to release the
brake/transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug in the right side of the shifter housing that
allows you to insert your finger to override the system. If
this occurs, obtain service as soon as possible.
255
Gear Ranges
DO NOT race the engine when shifting from PARK or
NEUTRAL position into another gear range.
Automatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock System
This system prevents the key from being removed unless
the shift lever is in PARK. It also prevents shifting out of
PARK unless the key is in the ACC or ON position, and
the brake pedal is depressed.
NOTE: If a malfunction occurs, the system will trap the
key in the ignition cylinder to warn you that this safety
feature is inoperable. The engine can be started and
stopped, but the key cannot be removed until you obtain
service.
5
Shift Lever
PARK
This supplements the parking brake by locking the
transmission. The engine can be started in this range.
256
STARTING AND OPERATING
Never use PARK while the vehicle is in motion. Apply
the parking brake when leaving the vehicle in this range.
Always apply the parking brake first, and then place the
shift lever into the PARK position.
The following indicators should be used to ensure that
you have engaged the shift lever into the PARK position:
WARNING!
• Look at the shift indicator window on the shifter bezel
to ensure it is in the PARK position.
Unintended movement of a vehicle could injure
those in and near the vehicle. As with all vehicles,
you should never exit a vehicle while the engine is
running. Before exiting a vehicle, you should always
shift the vehicle into PARK, remove the key from the
ignition, and apply the parking brake. Once the key
is removed from the ignition, the shift lever is locked
in the PARK position, securing the vehicle against
unwanted movement. Furthermore, you should never
leave unattended children inside a vehicle.
• When shifting into PARK firmly move the shift lever
all the way forward until it stops.
• You must depress the brake pedal to move the shift
lever out of the PARK position.
CAUTION!
Before moving the shift lever out of PARK, you must
turn the ignition from LOCK to ON so the steering
wheel and shift lever are released. Otherwise, damage to the steering column or shift lever could result.
You must also depress the brake pedal.
STARTING AND OPERATING
REVERSE
Shift into this range only after the vehicle has come to a
complete stop.
NEUTRAL
The engine may be started in this range.
DRIVE
This should be used for most driving and provides the
best ratio for optimum drivability, fuel economy, and
performance.
AUTOSTICK姞 — IF EQUIPPED
Autostick威 is a driver-interactive transmission that offers
six manual ratio changes to provide you with more
control. Autostick威 allows you to maximize engine braking, eliminate undesirable upshifts and downshifts, and
improve overall vehicle performance. This system can
also provide you with more control during passing, city
driving, cold slippery conditions, mountain driving,
257
trailer towing, and many other situations. Automatic
ratio changes upward will only occur to protect the
Continuously Variable Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
and/or the engine from overspeed. Changes down will
only happen at minimum engine speed to prevent stalling.
5
258
STARTING AND OPERATING
Operation
NOTE: Autostick威 is not functional until the CVT
warms up in cold weather.
Autostick威 operation is activated in the DRIVE position
by moving the shift lever side-to-side. Moving the shift
lever to the (+) side will activate Autostick威 and shift up
to the next higher manual ratio, unless you are already
operating in or near Overdrive, in which case 6th ratio
will be selected. In like manner, moving the shift lever to
(-) will activate Autostick威 and shift to the next lower
manual ratio. After Autostick威 is activated, the manual
ratio selected is displayed in the transmission ratio
display and tipping the shift lever to the (+) or (-)
direction will cause an upshift or downshift by one ratio.
Autostick威 is deactivated:
• By holding the shift lever to (+) momentarily
• When the shift lever is shifted out of DRIVE
• When in 6th position, touching the shift lever to the
right
• When heavy Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) application is detected
General Information
• If a ratio other than 1st is selected and the vehicle is
brought to a stop, the transaxle control logic will
automatically select the 1st gear ratio.
• If a low range is selected and the engine accelerates to
the rev limit, the transaxle will automatically select the
next higher ratio.
• If a downshift would cause the engine to overspeed,
that shift will not occur until it is safe for the engine.
However. the CVT will stay in the manually selected
ratio.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• If the system detects powertrain overheating, the
transmission will revert to the automatic shift mode
and remain in that mode until the powertrain cools off.
• If the system detects a problem, it will disable the
Autostick威 mode and the transmission will return to
the automatic mode until the problem is corrected.
259
WARNING!
Rapid acceleration on slippery surfaces is dangerous.
Unequal traction can cause sudden pulling of the
front wheels. You could lose control of the vehicle
and possibly have an accident. Accelerate slowly and
carefully whenever there is likely to be poor traction
(ice, snow, wet, mud, loose sand, etc.).
DRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES
Acceleration
Rapid acceleration on snow covered, wet, or other slippery surfaces may cause the front wheels to pull erratically to the right or left. This phenomenon occurs when
there is a difference in the surface traction under the front
(driving) wheels.
Traction
When driving on wet or slushy roads, it is possible for a
wedge of water to build up between the tire and road
surface. This is hydroplaning and may cause partial or
complete loss of vehicle control and stopping ability. To
reduce this possibility, the following precautions should
be observed:
1. Slow down during rainstorms or when roads are
slushy.
5
260
STARTING AND OPERATING
2. Slow down if the road has standing water or puddles.
3. Replace the tires when tread wear indicators first
become visible.
4. Keep the tires properly inflated.
5. Maintain enough distance between your vehicle and
the vehicle in front of you to avoid a collision in a sudden
stop.
DRIVING THROUGH WATER
Driving through water more than a few inches/
centimeters deep will require extra caution to ensure
safety and prevent damage to your vehicle.
Flowing/Rising Water
WARNING!
Do not drive on or cross a road or a path where water
is flowing and/or rising (as in storm run-off). Flowing water can wear away the road or path’s surface
and cause your vehicle to sink into deeper water.
Furthermore, flowing and/or rising water can carry
your vehicle away swiftly. Failure to follow this
warning may result in injuries that are serious or
fatal to you, your passengers, and others around you.
Shallow Standing Water
Although your vehicle is capable of driving through
shallow standing water, consider the following Caution
and Warning before doing so.
STARTING AND OPERATING
261
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Always check the depth of the standing water
before driving through it. Never drive through
standing water that is deeper than the bottom of
the tire rims mounted on the vehicle.
• Determine the condition of the road or the path
that is under water and if there are any obstacles in
the way before driving through the standing water.
• Do not exceed 5 mph (8 km/h) when driving
through standing water. This will minimize wave
effects.
• Driving through standing water may cause damage to your vehicle’s drivetrain components. Always inspect your vehicle’s fluids (i.e., engine oil,
transmission/transaxle, axle, etc.) for signs of contamination (i.e., fluid that is milky or foamy in
appearance) after driving through standing water.
Do not continue to operate the vehicle if any fluid
appears contaminated, as this may result in further
damage. Such damage is not covered by the New
Vehicle Limited Warranty.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and cause serious
internal damage to the engine. Such damage is not
covered by the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.
(Continued)
5
262
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s traction capabilities. Do not exceed 5 mph
(8 km/h) when driving through standing water.
• Driving through standing water limits your vehicle’s braking capabilities, which increases stopping distances. Therefore, after driving through
standing water, drive slowly and lightly press on
the brake pedal several times to dry the brakes.
• Getting water inside your vehicle’s engine can
cause it to lock up and stall out, and leave you
stranded.
• Failure to follow these warnings may result in
injuries that are serious or fatal to you, your
passengers, and others around you.
POWER STEERING
The standard power steering system will give you good
vehicle response and increased ease of maneuverability
in tight spaces. The system will provide mechanical
steering capability if power assist is lost.
If for some reason the power assist is interrupted, it will
still be possible to steer your vehicle. Under these conditions, you will observe a substantial increase in steering
effort, especially at very low vehicle speeds and during
parking maneuvers.
NOTE: Increased noise levels at the end of the steering
wheel travel are considered normal and do not indicate
that there is a problem with the power steering system.
Upon initial start-up in cold weather, the power steering
pump may make noise for a short amount of time. This is
due to the cold, thick fluid in the steering system. This
noise should be considered normal, and it does not in any
way damage the steering system.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Continued operation with reduced power steering
assist could pose a safety risk to yourself and others.
Service should be obtained as soon as possible.
263
apparent, and/or the system is not functioning as anticipated. Coordinate inspection efforts through an authorized dealer.
No chemical flushes should be used in any power
steering system; only the approved lubricant may be
used.
CAUTION!
Prolonged operation of the steering system at the end
of the steering wheel travel will increase the steering
fluid temperature and it should be avoided when
possible. Damage to the power steering pump may
occur.
Power Steering Fluid Check
Checking the power steering fluid level at a defined
service interval is not required. The fluid should only be
checked if a leak is suspected, abnormal noises are
WARNING!
Fluid level should be checked on a level surface and
with the engine off to prevent injury from moving
parts and to ensure accurate fluid level reading. Do
not overfill. Use only manufacturer’s recommended
power steering fluid.
If necessary, add fluid to restore to the proper indicated
level. With a clean cloth, wipe any spilled fluid from all
surfaces. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine
Parts” in Section 7 for the correct fluid type.
5
264
STARTING AND OPERATING
PARKING BRAKE
When the parking brake is applied with the ignition ON,
the Brake Light in the instrument cluster will come on.
NOTE: The parking brake lever will not release unless
the lever is pulled up slightly past its applied position.
NOTE: This light only shows that the parking brake is
on. It does not show the degree of brake application.
If the parking brake is applied while the vehicle is
moving, a chime will sound to alert the driver. The chime
will sound up to 10 times or until the vehicle has
returned to a stop.
Before leaving the vehicle, make sure that the parking
brake is set. To set the parking brake, pull up firmly on
the lever. Also, place the shift lever in the PARK position
(automatic transaxle) or REVERSE position (manual
transaxle). To release the parking brake, apply the brake
pedal, pull up slightly on the lever, then depress the
button on the end of the lever and push the lever fully
down toward the floor.
Parking Brake
When parking on a hill, it is important to set the parking
brake before placing the shift lever in PARK, otherwise,
the load on the automatic transaxle locking mechanism
may make it difficult to move the shift lever out of PARK.
STARTING AND OPERATING
As an added precaution, turn the front wheels toward the
curb on a downhill grade and away from the curb on a
uphill grade.
You should always apply the parking brake before leaving the vehicle.
WARNING!
• Never leave children alone in a vehicle. Leaving
unattended children in a vehicle is dangerous for a
number of reasons. A child or others could be
seriously or fatally injured. Do not leave the key in
the ignition. A child could operate power windows, other controls, or move the vehicle.
• Be sure the parking brake is fully disengaged
before driving; failure to do so can lead to brake
failure and an accident.
265
BRAKE SYSTEM
Your vehicle is equipped with power assisted brakes as
standard equipment. In the event power assist is lost for
any reason (for example, repeated brake applications
with the engine off), the brakes will still function. However, the effort required to brake the vehicle will be much
greater than that required with the power system operating.
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
5
266
STARTING AND OPERATING
If either of the two hydraulic systems lose normal capability, the remaining system will still function with some
loss of overall braking effectiveness. This will be evident
by increased pedal travel during application and greater
pedal force required to slow or stop. In addition, if the
malfunction is caused by an internal leak, as the brake
fluid in the master cylinder drops, the brake warning
indicator will light.
WARNING!
Driving a vehicle with the brake light on is dangerous. A significant decrease in braking performance or
vehicle stability during braking may occur. It will
take you longer to stop the vehicle or will make your
vehicle harder to control. You could have an accident.
Have the vehicle checked immediately.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) — If Equipped
The ABS provides increased vehicle stability and brake
performance under most braking conditions. The system
automatically “pumps” the brakes during severe braking
conditions to prevent wheel lock-up.
WARNING!
• Pumping of the Anti-Lock Brakes will diminish
their effectiveness and may lead to an accident.
Pumping makes the stopping distance longer. Just
press firmly on your brake pedal when you need
to slow down or stop.
• The ABS cannot prevent the natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle, nor can it increase
braking or steering efficiency beyond that afforded by the condition of the vehicle brakes and
tires or the traction afforded.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The ABS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
following another vehicle too closely, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver
can prevent accidents.
• The capabilities of an ABS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
The ABS light monitors the ABS System. The
light will come on when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position and may stay on for
as long as four seconds.
If the ABS light remains on or comes on while driving, it
indicates that the Anti-Lock portion of the brake system
is not functioning and that service is required. However,
267
the conventional brake system will continue to operate
normally if the BRAKE warning light is not on.
If the ABS light is on, the brake system should be serviced
as soon as possible to restore the benefits of Anti-Lock
brakes. If the ABS light does not come on when the
ignition switch is turned to the ON position, have the
bulb repaired as soon as possible.
If both the Brake Warning light and the ABS light remain
on, the ABS and Electronic Brake Force Distribution
(EBD) systems are not functioning. Immediate repair to
the ABS is required.
When the vehicle is driven over 7 mph (11 km/h), you
may also hear a slight clicking sound as well as some
related motor noises. These noises are the system performing its self-check cycle to ensure that the ABS
working properly. This self-check occurs each time the
vehicle is started and accelerated past 7 mph (11 km/h).
5
268
STARTING AND OPERATING
ABS is activated during braking under certain road or
stopping conditions. ABS-inducing conditions can include ice, snow, gravel, bumps, railroad tracks, loose
debris, or panic stops.
You may also experience the following when the brake
system goes into Anti-Lock mode:
• the ABS motor running (it may continue to run for a
short time after the stop)
• the clicking sound of solenoid valves
• brake pedal pulsations
• a slight drop or fall away of the brake pedal at the end
of the stop
These are all normal characteristics of ABS.
WARNING!
The Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) contains sophisticated electronic equipment that may be susceptible
to interference caused by improperly installed or
high output radio transmitting equipment. This interference can cause possible loss of Anti-Lock braking capability. Installation of such equipment should
be performed by qualified professionals.
All vehicle wheels and tires must be the same size and
type and tires must be properly inflated to produce
accurate signals for the computer.
ELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM
Your vehicle may be equipped with an optional advanced electronic brake control system that includes
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), Brake Assist System
(BAS), Traction Control System (TCS), and Electronic
Stability Program (ESP). All systems work together to
STARTING AND OPERATING
enhance vehicle stability and control in various driving
conditions and are commonly referred to as ESP.
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)
This system aids the driver in maintaining vehicle control
under adverse braking conditions. The system controls
hydraulic brake pressure to prevent wheel lockup and
help avoid skidding on slippery surfaces during braking.
Refer to “Anti-Lock Brake System” in this section of the
manual for more information about ABS.
Brake Assist System (BAS)
The BAS is designed to optimize the vehicle’s braking
capability during emergency braking maneuvers. The
system detects an emergency braking situation by sensing the rate and amount of brake application and then
applies optimum pressure to the brakes. This can help
reduce braking distances. The BAS complements the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS). Applying the brakes very
quickly results in the best BAS assistance. To receive the
269
benefit of the system, you must apply continuous braking pressure during the stopping sequence (do not
“pump” the brakes). Do not reduce brake pedal pressure
unless braking is no longer desired. Once the brake pedal
is released, the BAS is deactivated.
WARNING!
• The Brake Assist System (BAS) cannot prevent the
natural laws of physics from acting on the vehicle,
nor can it increase the traction afforded by prevailing road conditions.
• The BAS cannot prevent accidents, including
those resulting from excessive speed in turns,
driving on very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
prevent accidents.
(Continued)
5
270
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• The capabilities of a BAS-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
Traction Control System (TCS)
This system monitors the amount of wheel spin of each of
the driven wheels. If wheel spin is detected, brake
pressure is applied to the slipping wheel(s) and engine
power is reduced to provide enhanced acceleration and
stability. A feature of the TCS system functions similar to
a limited slip differential and controls the wheel spin
across a driven axle. If one wheel on a driven axle is
spinning faster than the other, the system will apply the
brake of the spinning wheel. This will allow more engine
torque to be applied to the wheel that is not spinning.
This feature remains active even if TCS and ESP are in the
“Partial Off” mode. Refer to “Electronic Stability Program (ESP)” in this Section of this manual.
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
This system enhances directional control and stability of
the vehicle under various driving conditions. ESP corrects for over-steering or under-steering of the vehicle by
applying the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over-steering or under-steering condition. Engine power may also be reduced to help the
vehicle maintain the desired path. ESP uses sensors in the
vehicle to determine the vehicle path intended by the
driver and compares it to the actual path of the vehicle.
When the actual path does not match the intended path,
ESP applies the brake of the appropriate wheel to assist in
counteracting the over-steer or under-steer condition.
• Oversteer - when the vehicle is turning more than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Understeer - when the vehicle is turning less than
appropriate for the steering wheel position.
ESP Indicator Light
The “ESP Indicator Light” located in the instrument
cluster, starts to flash as soon as the tires lose traction and
the ESP system becomes active. If the “ESP Indicator
Light” begins to flash during acceleration, ease up on the
accelerator and apply as little throttle as possible. Be sure
to adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road
conditions.
WARNING!
• Electronic Stability Program (ESP) cannot prevent
the natural laws of physics from acting on the
vehicle, nor can it increase the traction afforded by
prevailing road conditions.
(Continued)
271
WARNING! (Continued)
• ESP cannot prevent accidents, including those
resulting from excessive speed in turns, driving on
very slippery surfaces, or hydroplaning. Only a
safe, attentive, and skillful driver can prevent
accidents.
• The capabilities of an ESP-equipped vehicle must
never be exploited in a reckless or dangerous
manner which could jeopardize the user’s safety
or the safety of others.
5
272
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP Operating Modes
The ESP system has two available operating modes.
Full On
This is the normal operating mode for ESP. Whenever the
vehicle is started the ESP system will be in this “On”
mode. This mode should be used for most driving
situations. ESP should only be turned to “Partial Off” for
specific reasons as noted below.
Partial Off
This mode is entered by momentarily depressing the ESP
OFF switch. This mode is intended to be used if the
vehicle is in deep snow, sand or gravel conditions and
more wheel spin than ESP would normally allow is
required to gain traction.
To turn ESP on again, momentarily depress the ESP OFF
switch. This will restore the normal “ESP On” mode of
operation.
NOTE: To improve the vehicle’s traction when driving
with snow chains, or starting off in deep snow, sand or
gravel, it may be desirable to switch to the “Partial Off”
mode by pressing the ESP OFF switch. Once the situation
requiring ESP to be switched to the “Partial Off” mode is
overcome, turn ESP back on by momentarily depressing
the ESP OFF switch. This may be done while the vehicle
is in motion.
STARTING AND OPERATING
ESP/BAS Warning Light and ESP Indicator Light
The malfunction indicator for the ESP is combined with
the BAS indicator. The yellow “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” and the yellow “ESP Indicator Light” in the
instrument cluster both come on when the ignition
switch is turned to the ON position. They should both go
out with the engine running. If the “ESP/BAS Warning
Lamp” comes on continuously with the engine running,
a malfunction has been detected in either the ESP or BAS
system, or both. If this light remains on after several
ignition cycles, and the vehicle has been driven several
miles/kilometers at speeds greater than 30 mph
(48 km/h), see your authorized dealer as soon as possible
to have the problem diagnosed and corrected.
273
NOTE:
• The “ESP Indicator Light” and the “ESP/BAS Warning
Light” come on momentarily each time the ignition
switch is turned ON.
• Each time the ignition is turned ON, the ESP System
will be ON even if it was turned off previously.
• The ESP Control System will make buzzing or clicking
sounds when it is active. This is normal; the sounds
will stop when ESP becomes inactive following the
maneuver that caused the ESP activation.
5
274
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION
Tire Markings
NOTE:
• P (Passenger) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. P-Metric tires have the letter “P”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: P215/65R15 95H.
• European-Metric tire sizing is based on European
design standards. Tires designed to this standard have
the tire size molded into the sidewall beginning with
the section width. The letter ⬙P⬙ is absent from this tire
size designation. Example: 215/65R15 96H.
1 — U.S. DOT Safety Standards
Code (TIN)
2 — Size Designation
3 — Service Description
4 — Maximum Load
5 — Maximum Pressure
6 — Treadwear, Traction and Temperature Grades
STARTING AND OPERATING
• LT (Light Truck) - Metric tire sizing is based on U.S.
design standards. The size designation for LT-Metric
tires is the same as for P-Metric tires except for the
letters “LT” that are molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: LT235/85R16.
• Temporary spare tires are high-pressure compact
spares designed for temporary emergency use only.
275
Tires designed to this standard have the letter “T”
molded into the sidewall preceding the size designation. Example: T145/80D18 103M.
• High flotation tire sizing is based on U.S. design
standards and it begins with the tire diameter molded
into the sidewall. Example: 31x10.5 R15 LT.
5
276
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Sizing Chart
EXAMPLE:
Size Designation:
P = Passenger car tire size based on U.S. design standards
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Passenger car tire based on European design standards
LT = Light truck tire based on U.S. design standards
T = Temporary spare tire
31 = Overall diameter in inches (in)
215 = Section width in millimeters (mm)
65 = Aspect ratio in percent (%)
— Ratio of section height to section width of tire
10.5 = Section width in inches (in)
R = Construction code
— ⬙R⬙ means radial construction
—⬙D⬙ means diagonal or bias construction
15 = Rim diameter in inches (in)
STARTING AND OPERATING
277
EXAMPLE:
Service Description:
95 = Load Index
— A numerical code associated with the maximum load a tire can carry
H = Speed Symbol
— A symbol indicating the range of speeds at which a tire can carry a load corresponding to
its load index under certain operating conditions
— The maximum speed corresponding to the speed symbol should only be achieved under
specified operating conditions (i.e., tire pressure, vehicle loading, road conditions, and
posted speed limits)
Load Identification:
ⴖ....blank....ⴖ = Absence of any text on the sidewall of the tire indicates a Standard Load (SL) tire
Extra Load (XL) = Extra load (or reinforced) tire
Light Load = Light load tire
C, D, E = Load range associated with the maximum load a tire can carry at a specified pressure
Maximum Load — Maximum load indicates the maximum load this tire is designed to carry
Maximum Pressure — Maximum pressure indicates the maximum permissible cold tire inflation pressure for this
tire
5
278
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Identification Number (TIN)
The TIN may be found on one or both sides of the tire,
however, the date code may only be on one side. Tires
with white sidewalls will have the full TIN, including the
date code, located on the white sidewall side of the tire.
Look for the TIN on the outboard side of black sidewall
tires as mounted on the vehicle. If the TIN is not found on
the outboard side, then you will find it on the inboard
side of the tire.
EXAMPLE:
DOT MA L9 ABCD 0301
DOT = Department of Transportation
— This symbol certifies that the tire is in compliance with the U.S. Department of Transportation tire
safety standards and is approved for highway use
MA = Code representing the tire manufacturing location (two digits)
L9 = Code representing the tire size (two digits)
ABCD = Code used by the tire manufacturer (one to four digits)
03 = Number representing the week in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—03 means the 3rd week.
01 = Number representing the year in which the tire was manufactured (two digits)
—01 means the year 2001
— Prior to July 2000, tire manufacturers were only required to have one number to represent the year
in which the tire was manufactured. Example: 031 could represent the 3rd week of 1981 or 1991
STARTING AND OPERATING
Tire Loading and Tire Pressure
Tire Placard Location
NOTE: The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed
on the driver’s side B-Pillar.
Tire and Loading Information Placard
279
This placard tells you important information about
the:
1) number of people that can be carried in the vehicle
2) total weight your vehicle can carry
3) tire size designed for your vehicle
4) cold tire inflation pressures for the front, rear, and
spare tires.
Loading
The vehicle maximum load on the tire must not exceed
the load carrying capacity of the tire on your vehicle. You
will not exceed the tire’s load carrying capacity if you
adhere to the loading conditions, tire size, and cold tire
inflation pressures specified on the Tire and Loading
Information placard and in the “Vehicle Loading” section
of this manual.
NOTE: Under a maximum loaded vehicle condition,
gross axle weight ratings (GAWRs) for the front and rear
Tire and Loading Information Placard
5
280
STARTING AND OPERATING
axles must not be exceeded. For further information on
GAWRs, vehicle loading, and trailer towing, refer to
“Vehicle Loading” in this section.
To determine the maximum loading conditions of your
vehicle, locate the statement “The combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or
XXX kg” on the Tire and Loading Information placard.
The combined weight of occupants, cargo/luggage and
trailer tongue weight (if applicable) should never exceed
the weight referenced here.
Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit
1. Locate the statement “The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX lbs or XXX kg”
on your vehicle’s placard.
2. Determine the combined weight of the driver and
passengers that will be riding in your vehicle.
3. Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX lbs or XXX kg.
4. The resulting figure equals the available amount of
cargo and luggage load capacity. For example, if “XXX”
amount equals 1,400 lbs (635 kg) and there will be five
150 lb (68 kg) passengers in your vehicle, the amount of
available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs
(295 kg) (since 5 x 150 = 750, and 1400 – 750 = 650 lbs
[295 kg]).
5. Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo
being loaded on the vehicle. That weight may not safely
exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity
calculated in step 4.
6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, load from your
trailer will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult this
manual to determine how this reduces the available
cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The following table shows examples on how to calculate total load, cargo/luggage, and towing capacities
of your vehicle with varying seating configurations
and number and size of occupants. This table is for
illustration purposes only and may not be accurate for
the seating and load carry capacity of your vehicle.
281
• For the following example, the combined weight of
occupants and cargo should never exceed 865 lbs
(392 kg).
5
282
STARTING AND OPERATING
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
Overloading of your tires is dangerous. Overloading
can cause tire failure, affect vehicle handling, and
increase your stopping distance. Use tires of the
recommended load capacity for your vehicle. Never
overload them.
TIRES — GENERAL INFORMATION
Tire Pressure
Proper tire inflation pressure is essential to the safe and
satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Three primary
areas are affected by improper tire pressure:
283
Safety
WARNING!
• Improperly inflated tires are dangerous and can
cause accidents.
• Underinflation increases tire flexing and can result in tire failure.
• Overinflation reduces a tire’s ability to cushion
shock. Objects on the road and chuckholes can
cause damage that result in tire failure.
• Unequal tire pressures can cause steering problems. You could lose control of your vehicle.
• Overinflated or underinflated tires can affect vehicle handling and can fail suddenly, resulting in
loss of vehicle control.
(Continued)
5
284
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
• Unequal tire pressures from one side of the vehicle to the other can cause the vehicle to drift to
the right or left.
• Always drive with each tire inflated to the recommended cold tire inflation pressure.
Economy
Improper inflation pressures can cause uneven wear
patterns to develop across the tire tread. These abnormal
wear patterns will reduce tread life resulting in a need for
earlier tire replacement. Underinflation also increases tire
rolling resistance and results in higher fuel consumption.
Ride Comfort and Vehicle Stability
Proper tire inflation contributes to a comfortable ride.
Overinflation produces a jarring and uncomfortable ride.
Tire Inflation Pressures
The proper cold tire inflation pressure is listed on the
driver’s side “B” Pillar.
Some vehicles may have Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information for vehicle loads that are less than the
maximum loaded vehicle condition. These pressure conditions will be found in the “Supplemental Tire Pressure
Information” section of this manual.
The pressure should be checked and adjusted as well as
inspecting for signs of tire wear or visible damage at least
once a month. Use a good quality pocket-type gauge to
check tire pressure. Do not make a visual judgement
when determining proper inflation. Radial tires may look
properly inflated even when they are underinflated.
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure, always reinstall the valve stem cap (if equipped). This
will prevent moisture and dirt from entering the
valve stem, which could damage the valve stem.
Inflation pressures specified on the placard are always
“cold tire inflation pressure.” Cold tire inflation pressure
is defined as the tire pressure after the vehicle has not
been driven for at least three hours or driven less than
1 mile (1.6 km) after a three hour period. The cold tire
inflation pressure must not exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the tire sidewall.
Check tire pressures more often if subject to a wide range
of outdoor temperatures as tire pressures vary with
temperature changes.
285
Tire pressures change by approximately 1 psi (7 kPa) per
12°F (7°C) of air temperature change. Keep this in mind
when checking tire pressure inside a garage, especially in
the Winter.
Example: If garage temperature = 68°F (20°C) and the
outside temperature = 32°F (0°C) then the cold tire
inflation pressure should be increased by 3 psi (21 kPa),
which equals 1 psi (7 kPa) for every 12°F (7°C) for this
outside temperature condition.
Tire pressure may increase from 2 to 6 psi (13 to 40 kPa)
during operation. Do not reduce this normal pressure
build up or your tire pressure will be too low.
Tire Pressures for High Speed Operation
The manufacturer advocates driving at safe speeds
within posted speed limits. Where speed limits or conditions are such that the vehicle can be driven at high
speeds, maintaining correct tire inflation pressure is very
important. Increased tire pressure and reduced vehicle
5
286
STARTING AND OPERATING
loading may be required for high-speed vehicle operation. Refer to original equipment or an authorized tire
dealer for recommended safe operating speeds, loading
and cold tire inflation pressures.
WARNING!
High speed driving with your vehicle under maximum load is dangerous. The added strain on your
tires could cause them to fail. You could have a
serious accident. Do not drive a vehicle loaded to the
maximum capacity at continuous speeds above
75 mph (120 km/h).
Radial Ply Tires
WARNING!
Combining radial ply tires with other types of tires
on your vehicle will cause your vehicle to handle
poorly. The instability could cause an accident. Always use radial ply tires in sets of four (or six, in the
case of trucks with dual rear wheels). Never combine
them with other types of tires.
Cuts and punctures in radial tires are repairable only in
the tread area because of sidewall flexing. Consult your
authorized tire dealer for radial tire repairs.
Compact Spare Tire — If Equipped
The compact spare is for temporary emergency use with
radial tires. It is engineered to be used on your style
STARTING AND OPERATING
vehicle only. Since this tire has limited tread life, the
original tire should be repaired (or replaced) and reinstalled at the first opportunity.
287
Do not install more than one compact spare tire/wheel
on the vehicle at any given time.
CAUTION!
WARNING!
• Temporary use spare tires are for emergency use
only. With these tires, do not drive more than
50 mph (80 km/h).
• Temporary-use spare tires have limited tread life.
When the tread is worn to the tread wear indicators, the temporary use spare tire needs to be
replaced.
• Be sure to follow the warnings which apply to
your spare. Failure to do so could result in spare
tire failure and loss of vehicle control.
Do not install a wheel cover or attempt to mount a
conventional tire on the compact spare wheel, since the
wheel is designed specifically for the compact spare.
Because of the reduced ground clearance, do not take
your vehicle through an automatic car wash with the
compact spare installed. Damage to the vehicle may
result.
Limited-Use Spare — If Equipped
The limited-use spare tire is for temporary emergency
use on your vehicle. This tire is identified by a limiteduse spare tire warning label located on the limited-use
spare tire and wheel assembly. This tire may look like the
original equipped tire on the front or rear axle of your
vehicle, but it is not. Installation of this limited-use spare
tire affects vehicle handling. Since it is not the same tire,
replace (or repair) the original tire and reinstall on the
vehicle at the first opportunity.
5
288
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
WARNING!
The limited-use spare tires are for emergency use
only. Installation of this limited-use spare tire affects
vehicle handling. With this tire, do not drive more
than 50 mph (80 km/h). Keep it inflated to the cold
tire inflation pressure listed on either your tire placard or limited-use spare tire and wheel assembly.
Replace (or repair) the original tire at the first opportunity and reinstall it on your vehicle. Failure to do
so could result in loss of vehicle control.
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause tire damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than
30 mph (48 km/h) or for more than 30 seconds
continuously when you are stuck, and do not let
anyone near a spinning wheel, no matter what the
speed.
Tire Spinning
When stuck in mud, sand, snow, or ice conditions, do not
spin your vehicle’s wheels faster than 30 mph (48 km/h)
or for longer than 30 seconds continuously without
stopping when you are stuck.
For additional information, refer to “Freeing A Stuck
Vehicle” in Section 6.
Tread Wear Indicators
Tread wear indicators are in the original equipment tires
to help you in determining when your tires should be
replaced.
STARTING AND OPERATING
289
Many states have laws requiring tire replacement at this
point.
Life of Tire
The service life of a tire is dependent upon varying
factors including, but not limited to:
• Driving style
• Tire pressure
5
• Distance driven
WARNING!
1 — Worn Tire
2 — New Tire
These indicators are molded into the bottom of the tread
grooves. They will appear as bands when the tread depth
becomes 1/16 in (2 mm). When the tread is worn to the
tread wear indicators, the tire should be replaced.
Tires and the spare tire should be replaced after six
years, regardless of the remaining tread. Failure to
follow this warning can result in sudden tire failure.
You could lose control and have an accident resulting
in serious injury or death.
290
STARTING AND OPERATING
Keep dismounted tires in a cool, dry place with as little
exposure to light as possible. Protect tires from contact
with oil, grease, and gasoline.
Replacement Tires
The tires on your new vehicle provide a balance of many
characteristics. They should be inspected regularly for
wear and correct cold tire inflation pressure. The manufacturer strongly recommends that you use tires equivalent to the originals in size, quality and performance
when replacement is needed. (Refer to the paragraph on
“Tread Wear Indicators”). Refer to the “Tire and Loading
Information” placard for the size designation of your tire.
The service description and load identification will be
found on the original equipment tire. Failure to use
equivalent replacement tires may adversely affect the
safety, handling, and ride of your vehicle. We recommend
that you contact your original equipment or an authorized tire dealer with any questions you may have on tire
specifications or capability.
WARNING!
• Do not use a tire, wheel size or rating other than
that specified for your vehicle. Some combinations
of unapproved tires and wheels may change suspension dimensions and performance characteristics, resulting in changes to steering, handling, and
braking of your vehicle. This can cause unpredictable handling and stress to steering and suspension components. You could lose control and have
an accident resulting in serious injury or death.
Use only the tire and wheel sizes with load ratings
approved for your vehicle.
• Never use a tire with a smaller load index or
capacity other than what was originally equipped
on your vehicle. Using a tire with a smaller load
index could result in tire overloading and failure.
You could lose control and have an accident.
(Continued)
STARTING AND OPERATING
291
WARNING! (Continued)
CAUTION!
• Failure to equip your vehicle with tires having
adequate speed capability can result in sudden tire
failure and loss of vehicle control.
Damage to the vehicle may result if tire chains are
used.
CAUTION!
Replacing original tires with tires of a different size
may result in false speedometer and odometer readings.
TIRE CHAINS
Due to limited clearance, tire chains are not recommended.
SNOW TIRES
Some areas of the country require the use of snow tires
during Winter. Standard tires are of the all-season type
and satisfy this requirement as indicated by the M+S
designation on the tire sidewall.
If you need snow tires, select tires equivalent in size and
type to the original equipment tires. Use snow tires only
in sets of four; failure to do so may adversely affect the
safety and handling of your vehicle.
Snow tires generally have lower speed ratings than what
was originally equipped with your vehicle and should
not be operated at sustained speeds over 75 mph
(120 km/h).
5
292
STARTING AND OPERATING
TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS
Tires on the front and rear axles of vehicles operate at
different loads and perform different steering, driving,
and braking functions. For these reasons, they wear at
unequal rates and tend to develop irregular wear patterns.
These effects can be reduced by timely rotation of tires.
The benefits of rotation are especially worthwhile with
aggressive tread designs such as those on all season type
tires. Rotation will increase tread life, help to maintain
mud, snow and wet traction levels, and contribute to a
smooth, quiet ride.
Tire Rotation
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance intervals. More frequent rotation is
permissible if desired. The reasons for any rapid or
unusual wear should be corrected prior to rotation being
performed.
STARTING AND OPERATING
293
TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS)
The Tire Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) will warn the
driver of a low tire pressure based on the vehicle recommended cold placard pressure.
The TPMS will warn the driver of a low tire pressure if
the tire pressure falls below the low-pressure warning
limit for any reason, including low temperature effects, or
natural pressure loss through the tire.
The tire pressure will vary with temperature by about
1 psi (6.9 kPa) for every 12°F (6.5°C). This means that
when the outside temperature decreases, the tire pressure
will decrease. Tire pressure should always be set based
on “cold inflation tire pressure”. This is defined as the tire
pressure after the vehicle has not been driven for at least
three hours, or driven less than 1 mile (1 km) after a three
hour period. The cold tire inflation pressure must not
exceed the maximum inflation pressure molded into the
tire sidewall. Refer to “Tires – General Information” in
this section for information on how to properly inflate the
vehicle’s tires. The tire pressure will also increase as the
vehicle is driven - this is normal and there should be no
adjustment for this increased pressure.
The TPMS will continue to warn the driver of low tire
pressure as long as the condition exists, and will not turn
off until the tire pressure is at or above the recommended
cold placard pressure. Once the low tire pressure warning (Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light) illuminates,
you must increase the tire pressure to the recommended
cold placard pressure in order for the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light to turn off. The system will
automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring
Telltale Light will turn off once the system receives the
updated tire pressures. The vehicle may need to be
driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) in
order for the TPMS to receive this information.
5
294
STARTING AND OPERATING
For example, your vehicle may have a recommended
cold (parked for more than three hours) placard pressure
of 30 psi (207 kPa). If the ambient temperature is 68°F
(20°C) and the measured tire pressure is 27 psi (186 kPa),
a temperature drop to 20°F (-7°C) will decrease the tire
pressure to approximately 26 psi (179 kPa). This tire
pressure is sufficiently low enough to turn ON the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light. Driving the vehicle
may cause the tire pressure to rise to approximately
27 psi (186 kPa), but the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will still be ON. In this situation, the Tire Pressure
Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF only after the
tires are inflated to the vehicle’s recommended cold
placard pressure value.
CAUTION!
• The TPMS has been optimized for the original
equipment tires and wheels. TPMS pressures and
warnings have been established for the tire size
equipped on your vehicle. Undesirable system
operation or sensor damage may result when using replacement equipment that is not of the same
size, type, and/or style. Aftermarket wheels can
cause sensor damage. Do not use aftermarket tire
sealants or balance beads if your vehicle is
equipped with a TPMS, as damage to the sensors
may result.
• After inspecting or adjusting the tire pressure,
always reinstall the valve stem cap. This will
prevent moisture and dirt from entering the valve
stem, which could damage the Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensor.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE:
• The TPMS is not intended to replace normal tire care
and maintenance or to provide warning of a tire failure
or condition.
295
• Seasonal temperature changes will affect tire pressure,
and the TPMS will monitor the actual tire pressure in
the tire.
• The TPMS should not be used as a tire pressure gauge
while adjusting your tire pressure.
Base System
This is the TPMS warning indicator located in the
instrument cluster.
• Driving on a significantly under-inflated tire causes
the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
Under-inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire
tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s handling and
stopping ability.
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the Receiver
Module.
• The TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance, and it is the driver’s responsibility to maintain
correct tire pressure using an accurate tire gauge, even
if under-inflation has not reached the level to trigger
illumination of the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
light.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of the tires on your vehicle regularly
and to maintain the proper pressure.
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
5
296
STARTING AND OPERATING
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
• Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster, and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. Should this occur, you should stop as
soon as possible, check the inflation pressure of each tire
on your vehicle, and inflate each tire to the vehicle’s
recommended cold placard pressure value. The system
will automatically update and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressures
have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven
for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive
this information.
Check TPMS Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds and remain on solid when a system
fault is detected. The system fault will also sound a
chime. If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will
repeat providing the system fault still exists. The Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn off when the
fault condition no longer exists. A system fault can occur
with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
STARTING AND OPERATING
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
297
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
Premium System — If Equipped
The TPMS uses wireless technology with wheel rim
mounted electronic sensors to monitor tire pressure levels. Sensors, mounted to each wheel as part of the valve
stem, transmit tire pressure readings to the receiver
module.
NOTE: It is particularly important for you to check the
tire pressure in all of your tires regularly and to maintain
the proper pressure.
5
298
STARTING AND OPERATING
The TPMS consists of the following components:
• Receiver Module
• Four Tire Pressure Monitoring Sensors
every ignition cycle for each condition that it detects. In
addition, the EVIC will display a graphic of the pressure
value(s) with the low tire(s) flashing.
• Three Trigger Modules (mounted in three of the four
wheel wells)
• Various Tire Pressure Monitoring System Messages,
which display in the Electronic Vehicle Information
Center (EVIC)
• Yellow Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
Tire Pressure Monitoring Low Pressure Warnings
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will illuminate in the instrument cluster and an audible chime will
be activated when one or more of the four active road tire
pressures are low. The audible chime will sound once
Low Tire Pressure Display
Should a low tire condition occur on any of the four
active road tire(s), you should stop as soon as possible
and inflate all tires that are flashing on the graphic
STARTING AND OPERATING
299
display to the vehicle’s recommended cold placard pressure value. The system will automatically update, the
graphic display of the pressure value(s) will stop flashing, and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Light will extinguish once the updated tire pressure(s) have been received. The vehicle may need to be driven for up to
20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h) to receive this
information.
Check TPMS Message
The Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on
and off for 75 seconds, and remain on solid when a
system fault is detected. The system fault will also sound
a chime. The EVIC will display a “CHECK TPM SYSTEM” message for three seconds. This text message is
then followed by a graphic display, with “- -“ in place of
the pressure value(s) indicating which Tire Pressure
Monitoring Sensor(s) is not being received.
5
Check TPM System Display
If the ignition key is cycled, this sequence will repeat,
providing the system fault still exists. If the system fault
no longer exists, the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale
Light will no longer flash, the ⬙CHECK TPM SYSTEM⬙
text message will not be present, and a pressure value
300
STARTING AND OPERATING
will be displayed instead of dashes. A system fault can
occur with any of the following scenarios:
1. Jamming due to electronic devices or driving next to
facilities emitting the same radio frequencies as the TPM
sensors.
2. Installing some form of aftermarket window tinting
that affects radio wave signals.
3. Snow or ice around the wheels or wheel housings.
4. Using tire chains on the vehicle.
5. Using wheels/tires not equipped with TPM sensors.
NOTE: Your vehicle is equipped with a compact spare
wheel and tire assembly.
1. The compact spare tire does not have a tire pressure
monitoring sensor. Therefore, the TPMS will not monitor
the tire pressure in the compact spare tire.
2. If you install the compact spare tire in place of a road
tire that has a pressure below the low-pressure warning
limit, upon the next ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will still turn ON due to the low tire.
3. However, after driving the vehicle for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph (25 km/h), the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will flash on and off for 75 seconds
and then remain on solid.
4. For each subsequent ignition key cycle, a chime will
sound and the Tire Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light
will flash on and off for 75 seconds and then remain on
solid.
5. Once you repair or replace the original road tire and
reinstall it on the vehicle in place of the compact spare
tire, the TPMS will update automatically and the Tire
Pressure Monitoring Telltale Light will turn OFF, as long
as no tire pressure is below the low-pressure warning
STARTING AND OPERATING
limit in any of the four active road tires. The vehicle may
need to be driven for up to 20 minutes above 15 mph
(25 km/h) in order for the TPMS to receive this
information.
General Information
This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and
RSS 210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the
following conditions:
• This device may not cause harmful interference.
• This device must accept any interference received,
including interference that may cause undesired
operation.
The tire pressure sensors are covered under one of the
following licenses:
United States . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . KR5S120123
Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2671-S120123
301
FUEL REQUIREMENTS
Your vehicle is designed to meet all emission regulations and provide excellent fuel
economy when using high-quality regular
unleaded gasoline with an octane rating of
87. The use of premium gasoline is not
recommended, as it will not provide any
benefit over regular gasoline in these engines.
Light spark knock at low engine speeds is not harmful to
your engine. However, continued heavy spark knock at
high speeds can cause damage and immediate service is
required.
Poor quality gasoline can cause problems such as hard
starting, stalling and hesitations. If you experience these
symptoms, try another brand of gasoline (with the appropriate octane rating for your engine) before considering service for the vehicle.
5
302
STARTING AND OPERATING
Reformulated Gasoline
Many areas of the country require the use of cleaner
burning gasoline referred to as “reformulated gasoline”.
“Reformulated gasolines” contain oxygenates and are
specifically blended to reduce vehicle emissions and
improve air quality.
CAUTION!
DO NOT use gasolines containing Methanol or E85
Ethanol. Use of these blends may result in starting
and drivability problems and may damage critical
fuel system components.
The manufacturer supports the use of “reformulated
gasolines”. Properly blended “reformulated gasolines”
will provide excellent performance and durability of
engine and fuel system components.
Problems that result from using methanol/gasoline
blends are not the responsibility of the manufacturer.
While MTBE is an oxygenate made from Methanol, it
does not have the negative effects of Methanol.
Gasoline/Oxygenate Blends
Some fuel suppliers blend unleaded gasoline with oxygenates such as 10% ethanol, MTBE, and ETBE. Oxygenates are required in some areas of the country during the
winter months to reduce carbon monoxide emissions.
Fuels blended with these oxygenates may be used in
your vehicle.
E-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel Vehicles
Non-FFV vehicles are compatible with gasoline containing 10% ethanol (E10). Gasoline with higher ethanol
content may void the vehicle’s warranty.
STARTING AND OPERATING
303
If a Non-FFV vehicle is inadvertently fueled with E-85
fuel, the engine will have some or all of these symptoms:
More extensive repairs will be required for prolonged
exposure to E-85 fuel.
• operate in a lean mode
MMT In Gasoline
MMT is a manganese containing metallic additive that is
blended into some gasoline to increase the octane number. Gasolines blended with MMT offer no performance
advantage beyond gasolines of the same octane number
without MMT. Gasolines blended with MMT have been
shown to reduce spark plug life and reduce emission
system performance in some vehicles. The manufacturer
recommends using gasolines without MMT. Since the
MMT content of gasoline may not be indicated on the
pump, you should ask your gasoline retailer whether or
not their gasoline contains MMT.
• OBD II “Malfunction Indicator Light” on
• poor engine performance
• poor cold start and cold drivability
• increased risk for fuel system component corrosion
To fix a Non-FFV vehicle inadvertently fueled once with
E-85 perform the following:
• drain the fuel tank (see your authorized dealer)
• change the engine oil and oil filter
• disconnect and reconnect the battery to reset the
engine controller memory
It is even more important to look for gasolines without
MMT in Canada, because MMT can be used at levels
higher than those allowed in the United States.
5
304
STARTING AND OPERATING
MMT is prohibited in Federal and California reformulated gasolines.
Materials Added To Fuel
All gasoline sold in the United States is required to
contain effective detergent additives. Use of additional
detergents or other additives is not needed under normal
conditions and would result in additional cost. Therefore
you should not have to add anything to the fuel.
Fuel System Cautions
CAUTION!
Follow these guidelines to maintain your vehicle’s
performance:
• The use of leaded gas is prohibited by Federal law.
Using leaded gasoline can impair engine performance
and damage the emission control system.
• An out-of-tune engine, or certain fuel or ignition
malfunctions, can cause the catalytic converter to
overheat. If you notice a pungent burning odor or
some light smoke, your engine may be out of tune or
malfunctioning and may require immediate service.
Contact your authorized dealer for service assistance.
• The use of fuel additives, which are now being sold as
octane enhancers, is not recommended. Most of these
products contain high concentrations of Methanol.
Fuel system damage or vehicle performance problems
resulting from the use of such fuels or additives is not
the responsibility of the manufacturer.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Carbon Monoxide Warnings
WARNING!
Carbon monoxide (CO) in exhaust gases is deadly.
Follow the precautions below to prevent carbon
monoxide poisoning:
• Do not inhale exhaust gases. They contain carbon
monoxide, a colorless and odorless gas which can kill.
Never run the engine in a closed area, such as a
garage, and never sit in a parked vehicle with the
engine running for an extended period of time. If the
vehicle is stopped in an open area with the engine
running for more than a short period, adjust the
ventilation system to force fresh, outside air into the
vehicle.
305
• Guard against carbon monoxide with proper maintenance. Have the exhaust system inspected every time
the vehicle is raised. Have any abnormal conditions
repaired promptly. Until repaired, drive with all side
windows fully open.
• Keep the liftgate closed when driving your vehicle to
prevent carbon monoxide and other poisonous exhaust gases from entering the vehicle.
5
ADDING FUEL
Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)
The gas cap is behind the fuel filler door, on the left side
of the vehicle. If the gas cap is lost or damaged, be sure
the replacement cap is for use with this vehicle.
306
STARTING AND OPERATING
After removing the gas cap, place the gas cap tether cable
over a hook on the inside of the fuel door. This keeps the
gas cap suspended away from and protects the vehicle’s
surface.
CAUTION!
• A poorly fitting gas cap may cause the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL) to turn on.
• To avoid fuel spillage and overfilling, do not “top
off” the fuel tank after filling.
NOTE: When the fuel nozzle “clicks” or shuts off, the
fuel tank is full.
WARNING!
Fuel Filler Door
• Never have any smoking materials lit in or near
the vehicle when the gas cap is removed or the
tank filled.
• Never add fuel when the engine is running. This is
in violation of most state and Federal fire regulations and will cause the Malfunction Indicator
Light (MIL) to turn on.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Tighten the gas cap about 1/4 turn until you
hear one click. This is an indication that cap is properly
tightened.
If the gas cap is not tighten properly, the MIL will come
on. Be sure the gas cap is tightened every time the vehicle
is refueled.
WARNING!
A fire may result if gasoline is pumped into a
portable container that is inside of a vehicle. You
could be burned. Always place gas containers on the
ground while filling.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
If the vehicle diagnostic system determines that the fuel
filler cap is loose or improperly installed, a “gASCAP”
message will be displayed in the Odometer/Trip Odometer in the instrument cluster. Refer to “Instrument
307
Cluster Description” in Section 4 of this manual. Tighten
the fuel filler cap properly and press the odometer/trip
odometer RESET button to turn the message off. If the
problem continues, the message will appear the next time
the vehicle is started. Refer to “Onboard Diagnostic
System — OBD II” in Section 7 of this manual for more
information.
CAUTION!
Damage to the fuel system or emission control system could result from using an improper fuel tank
filler cap (gas cap). A poorly fitting cap could let
impurities into the fuel system.
VEHICLE LOADING
As required by National Highway Traffic Safety Administration regulations, your vehicle has a certification label
affixed to the driver’s side door or B-Pillar.
5
308
STARTING AND OPERATING
Vehicle Certification Label
Your vehicle has a Vehicle Certification Label attached to
the driver’s door B-Pillar.
The label contains the following information:
• Name of manufacturer
• Month and year of manufacture
• Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Type of Vehicle
• Month, Day and Hour of Manufacture (MDH)
The bar code allows a computer scanner to read the
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, and cargo. The total
load must be limited so that you do not exceed the
GVWR.
Tire Size
The tire size on the Vehicle Certification Label represents
the actual tire size on your vehicle. Replacement tires
must be equal to the load capacity of this tire size.
Rim Size
This is the rim size that is appropriate for the tire size
listed.
Inflation Pressure
This is the cold tire inflation pressure for your vehicle, for
all loading conditions.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Curb Weight
The curb weight of a vehicle is defined as the total weight
of the vehicle with all fluids, including vehicle fuel, at full
capacity conditions, and with no occupants or cargo
loaded into the vehicle. The front and rear curb weight
values are determined by weighing your vehicle on a
commercial scale before any occupants or cargo are
added.
Overloading
The load carrying components (springs, tires, wheels,
etc.) of your vehicle will provide satisfactory service as
long as you do not exceed the GVWR.
The best way to figure out the total weight of your
vehicle is to weigh it when it is fully loaded and ready for
operation. Weigh it on a commercial scale to ensure that
it is not over the GVWR.
309
Overloading can cause potential safety hazards and
shorten useful service life. Heavier suspension components do not necessarily increase the vehicle’s GVWR.
Loading
To load your vehicle properly, first figure out its empty
weight. Store heavier items down low and be sure you
distribute their weight as evenly as possible. Stow all
loose items securely before driving. Improper weight
distribution can have an adverse effect on the way your
vehicle steers and handles, and the way the brakes
operate.
CAUTION!
Do not load your vehicle any heavier than the
GVWR. If you do, parts on your vehicle can break, or
it can change the way your vehicle handles. This
could cause you to lose control. Also, overloading can
shorten the life of your vehicle.
5
310
STARTING AND OPERATING
TRAILER TOWING
In this section, you will find safety tips and information
on limits to the type of towing you can reasonably do
with your vehicle. Before towing a trailer carefully review this information to tow your load as efficiently and
safely as possible.
To maintain warranty coverage, follow the requirements
and recommendations in this manual concerning vehicles used for trailer towing.
Common Towing Definitions
The following trailer towing related definitions will assist
you in understanding the following information:
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR)
The GVWR is the total allowable weight of your vehicle.
This includes driver, passengers, cargo and tongue
weight. The total load must be limited so that you do not
exceed the GVWR.
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the weight of all
cargo, consumables and equipment (permanent or temporary) loaded in or on the trailer in its ⬙loaded and
ready for operation⬙ condition. The recommended way to
measure GTW is to put your fully loaded trailer on a
vehicle scale. The entire weight of the trailer must be
supported by the scale.
Gross Combination Weight Rating (GCWR)
The GCWR is the total permissible weight of your vehicle
and trailer when weighed in combination.
NOTE: GCWR ratings include a 150 lbs (68 kg) allowance for the presence of a driver.
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR)
The GAWR is the maximum capacity of the front and rear
axles. Distribute the load over the front and rear axles
evenly. Make sure that you do not exceed either the front
or rear GAWR.
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING!
It is important that you do not exceed the maximum
front or rear GAWR. A dangerous driving condition
can result if either rating is exceeded. You could lose
control of the vehicle and have an accident.
Tongue Weight (TW)
The tongue weight is the downward force exerted on the
hitch ball by the trailer. In most cases it should not be less
than 10% or more than 15% of the trailer load. You must
consider this as part of the load on your vehicle.
Frontal Area
The frontal area is the maximum height and maximum
width of the front of a trailer.
Trailer Sway Control
The trailer sway control is a telescoping link that can be
installed between the hitch receiver and the trailer tongue
311
that typically provides adjustable friction associated with
the telescoping motion to dampen any unwanted trailer
swaying motions while traveling.
Weight-Carrying Hitch
A weight-carrying hitch supports the trailer tongue
weight, just as if it were luggage located at a hitch ball or
some other connecting point of the truck. These kind of
hitches are the most popular on the market today and
they’re commonly used to tow small- and medium-sized
trailers.
Weight-Distributing Hitch
A weight-distributing hitch system works by applying
leverage through spring (load) bars. They are typically
used for heavier loads, to distribute trailer tongue weight
to the tow vehicle’s front axle and the trailer axle(s).
When used in accordance with the manufacturer’s directions, it provides for a more level ride, offering more
5
312
STARTING AND OPERATING
consistent steering and brake control and thereby enhancing towing safety. The addition of a friction/
hydraulic sway control also dampens sway caused by
traffic and crosswinds, contributing positively to tow
vehicle and trailer stability. Trailer sway control and a
weight distributing (load equalizing) hitch are recommended for heavier Tongue Weights (TW) and may be
required depending on Vehicle and Trailer
configuration/loading to comply with GAWR
requirements.
Installing A Trailer Hitch
NOTE: If you install a trailer hitch after you purchase
the vehicle, you must install a MOPAR威 spare tire hold
down kit. The kit will allow you to properly secure the
spare tire and jack assembly.
WARNING!
Do not operate the vehicle without a properly secured tire and jack assembly. Any loose items may be
thrown forward in a collision or hard stop and strike
occupants, causing serious or fatal injury.
Trailer Hitch Classification
The following chart provides the industry standard for
the maximum trailer weight a given trailer hitch class can
tow and should be used to assist you in selecting the
correct trailer hitch for your intended towing condition.
Refer to the Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer
Weight Ratings) chart for the Maximum GTW towable
for your given drivetrain.
STARTING AND OPERATING
Trailer Hitch Classification Definitions
Class
Max. Trailer Hitch Industry
Standards
Class I - Light Duty
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Refer to the “Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum
Trailer Weight Ratings)” chart for the Maximum
Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) towable for your given
drivetrain.
313
All trailer hitches should be professionally installed on
your vehicle.
Trailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)
The following chart provides the maximum trailer weight ratings towable for your given drivetrain.
Engine/Transmission
Frontal Area
Max. GTW (Gross Trailer Wt.)
2.0L Auto/Man
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
2.4L Auto/Man
22 sq ft (2.04 sq m)
2.4L Auto/Man with
32 sq ft (3.0 sq m)
Trailer Tow Prep Package (AHC)
Refer to local laws for maximum trailer towing speeds.
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
1,000 lbs (450 kg)
2,000 lbs (907 kg)
Max. Tongue Wt. (See Note
1)
150 lbs (50 kg)
150 lbs (50 kg)
300 lbs (136 kg)
5
314
STARTING AND OPERATING
Note 1 – The trailer tongue weight must be considered as
part of the combined weight of occupants and cargo and
should never exceed the weight referenced on the Tire
and Loading Information placard. Refer to “Tire–Safety
Information” under “Starting and Operating” in
Section 5.
Trailer And Tongue Weight
Always load a trailer with 60% to 65% of the weight in
the front of the trailer. This places 10% to 15% of the GTW
on the tow hitch of your vehicle. Loads balanced over the
wheels or heavier in the rear can cause the trailer to sway
severely from side-to-side which will cause loss of control of vehicle and trailer. Failure to load trailers heavier
in front is the cause of many trailer accidents.
Never exceed the maximum tongue weight stamped on
your bumper or trailer hitch.
Consider the following items when computing the
weight on the rear axle of the vehicle:
• The tongue weight of the trailer.
• The weight of any other type of cargo or equipment
put in or on your vehicle.
• The weight of the driver and all passengers.
STARTING AND OPERATING
NOTE: Remember that everything put into or on the
trailer adds to the load on your vehicle. Also, additional
factory-installed options, or dealer-installed options,
must be considered as part of the total load on your
vehicle. Refer to the “Tire and Loading Information
placard” under “Tire Safety Information” in Section 5 of
this manual for the maximum combined weight of occupants and cargo for your vehicle.
Towing Requirements
To promote proper break-in of your new vehicle drivetrain components, the following guidelines are recommended:
CAUTION!
315
CAUTION! (Continued)
• During the first 500 miles (805 km) of trailer
towing, limit your speed to 50 mph (80 km/h).
Perform the maintenance listed in Section 8 of this
manual. When towing a trailer, never exceed the GAWR
or GCWR ratings.
5
WARNING!
Improper towing can lead to an injury accident.
Follow these guidelines to make your trailer towing
as safe as possible:
(Continued)
• Avoid towing a trailer for the first 500 miles
(805 km) of vehicle operation. Doing so may damage your vehicle.
(Continued)
316
STARTING AND OPERATING
WARNING! (Continued)
Make certain that the load is secured in the trailer
and will not shift during travel. When trailering
cargo that is not fully secured, dynamic load shifts
can occur that may be difficult for the driver to
control. You could lose control of your vehicle and
have an accident.
• When hauling cargo or towing a trailer, do not overload your vehicle or trailer. Overloading can cause a
loss of control, poor performance or damage to the
brakes, axle, engine, transmission, steering, suspension, chassis structure or tires.
• Safety chains must always be used between your
vehicle and trailer. Always connect the chains to the
frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch. Cross the
chains under the trailer tongue and allow enough
slack for turning corners.
• Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade.
When parking, apply the parking brake on the tow
vehicle. Put the tow vehicle automatic transmission in
PARK. With a manual transmission, shift the transmission into REVERSE. Always block or ⬙chock⬙ the trailer
wheels.
• GCWR must not be exceeded.
• Total weight must be distributed between the tow
vehicle and the trailer such that the following four
ratings are not exceeded:
1. GVWR
2. GTW
3. GAWR
STARTING AND OPERATING
4. Tongue weight rating for the trailer hitch utilized
(this requirement may limit the ability to always
achieve the 10% to 15% range of tongue weight as a
percentage of total trailer weight).
317
− When replacing tires, refer to “Tires–General Information” for proper tire replacement procedures. Replacing tires with a higher load carrying capacity will not
increase the vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR limits.
Towing Requirements — Tires
Towing Requirements — Trailer Brakes
− Do not attempt to tow a trailer while using a compact
spare tire.
− Do not interconnect the hydraulic brake system or
vacuum system of your vehicle with that of the trailer.
This could cause inadequate braking and possible
personal injury.
− Proper tire inflation pressures are essential to the safe
and satisfactory operation of your vehicle. Refer to
“Tires–General Information” for proper tire inflation
procedures.
− Check the trailer tires for proper tire inflation pressures before trailer usage.
− Check for signs of tire wear or visible tire damage
before towing a trailer. Refer to “Tires–General Information” for the proper inspection procedure.
− An electronically actuated trailer brake controller is
required when towing a trailer with electronically
actuated brakes. When towing a trailer equipped with
a hydraulic surge actuated brake system, an electronic
brake controller is not required.
− Trailer brakes are recommended for trailers over
1,000 lbs (450 kg) and required for trailers in excess of
2,000 lbs (907 kg).
5
318
STARTING AND OPERATING
CAUTION!
WARNING! (Continued)
If the trailer weighs more than 1,000 lbs (450 kg)
loaded, it should have its own brakes and they
should be of adequate capacity. Failure to do this
could lead to accelerated brake lining wear, higher
brake pedal effort, and longer stopping distances.
• Towing any trailer will increase your stopping
distance. When towing, you should allow for additional space between your vehicle and the vehicle in front of you. Failure to do so could result
in an accident.
WARNING!
• Do not connect trailer brakes to your vehicle’s
hydraulic brake lines. It can overload your brake
system and cause it to fail. You might not have
brakes when you need them and could have an
accident.
(Continued)
Towing Requirements — Trailer Lights and Wiring
Whenever you pull a trailer, regardless of the trailer size,
stop lights and turn signals on the trailer are required for
motoring safety.
The Trailer Tow Package may include a 4-pin and 7-pin
wiring harness. Use a factory approved trailer harness
and connector.
NOTE: Do not cut or splice wiring into the vehicle’s
wiring harness.
STARTING AND OPERATING
319
The electrical connections are all complete to the vehicle,
but you must mate the harness to a trailer connector.
Refer to the following illustrations.
5
7-Pin Connector
4-Pin Connector
1 — Female Pins
2 — Male Pin
3 — Ground
4 — Park
5 — Left Stop/Turn
6 — Right Stop/Turn
1
2
3
4
—
—
—
—
Battery
Backup Lamps
Right Stop/Turn
Electric Brakes
5 — Ground
6 — Left Stop/Turn
7 — Running Lamps
320
STARTING AND OPERATING
Towing Tips
Before setting out on a trip, practice turning, stopping
and backing the trailer in an area away from heavy
traffic.
If using a manual transmission vehicle for trailer towing,
all starts must be in 1st gear to avoid excessive clutch
slippage.
Electronic Speed Control — If Equipped
− Do not use in hilly terrain or with heavy loads.
− When using the speed control, if you experience speed
drops greater than 10 mph (16 km/h), disengage it
until you can get back to cruising speed.
− Use speed control in flat terrain and with light loads to
maximize fuel efficiency.
Cooling System
To reduce potential for engine and transmission overheating, take the following actions:
− City Driving
When stopped for short periods of time, put the transmission in NEUTRAL and increase the engine idle speed.
− Highway Driving
Reduce speed.
− Air Conditioning
Turn off temporarily.
STARTING AND OPERATING
RECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND
MOTORHOME, ETC.)
Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat
Towing With All Four Wheels On The Ground)
Recreational
Towing Condition
Four Wheel Flat
Tow (All Wheels
on Ground)
Two Wheel
Dolly Tow (Front
or Rear Wheels
on Ground)
Flat Bed Tow
(All Wheels on
Bed of Truck)
Manual Transaxle Vehicles
Yes
Automatic
Transaxle Vehicles
Never
Never
Never
Yes
Yes
321
NOTE: Vehicles equipped with manual transaxles may
be recreationally towed (flat towed) at any legal highway
speed, for any distance, if the manual transaxle is in
NEUTRAL and the ignition key is in the ACC position.
CAUTION!
• DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with a
automatic transaxle. Damage to the drivetrain will
result. If these vehicles require towing, make sure
all four wheels are off the ground.
• Front or rear wheel lifts should not be used.
Internal damage to the transaxle will occur if a
front or rear wheel lift is used when recreational
towing.
5
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CONTENTS
䡵 Hazard Warning Flasher
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
▫ Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
䡵 If Your Engine Overheats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
䡵 Jump-Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
䡵 Automatic Transaxle Overheating . . . . . . . . . . 325
䡵 Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
䡵 Jacking And Tire Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
䡵 Towing A Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ With Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
▫ Spare Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
▫ Without The Ignition Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336
▫ Preparations For Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
6
324
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
HAZARD WARNING FLASHER
The Hazard Warning flasher switch is located on the
instrument panel, below the radio.
Press the switch to turn on the Hazard Warning
flashers. When the Hazard Warning flasher switch
is activated, all directional turn signals will flash
on and off to warn oncoming traffic of an emergency.
Press the switch a second time to turn off flashers.
Do not use this emergency warning system when the
vehicle is in motion. Use it when your vehicle is disabled
and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists.
If it is necessary to leave the vehicle to go for service, the
Hazard Warning flasher will continue to operate with the
ignition key removed and the vehicle locked.
NOTE: With extended use, the Hazard Warning flasher
may wear down your battery.
IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS
In any of the following situations, you can reduce the
potential for overheating by taking the appropriate action.
• On the highways — Slow down.
• In city traffic — While stopped, put the transmission in
NEUTRAL, but do not increase engine idle speed.
If the pointer rises to the H (red) mark, the instrument
cluster will sound a chime. When safe, pull over and stop
the vehicle with the engine at idle. Turn off the air
conditioning and wait until the pointer drops back into
the normal range. If the pointer remains on the H (red)
mark for more than a minute, turn the engine off immediately and call for service.
NOTE: There are steps that you can take to slow down
an impending overheat condition. If your air conditioner
is on, turn it off. The air conditioning system adds heat to
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
the engine cooling system and turning off the A/C
removes this heat. You can also turn the Temperature
control to maximum heat, the Mode control to floor, and
the fan control to high. This allows the heater core to act
as a supplement to the radiator and aids in removing heat
from the engine cooling system.
CAUTION!
Driving with a hot cooling system could damage
your vehicle. If the temperature gauge reads “H”,
pull over when safe and stop the vehicle with the
engine at idle. Turn the air conditioner off and wait
until the pointer drops back into the normal range.
After appropriate action has been taken, if the
pointer remains on the “H”, turn the engine OFF
immediately and call for service.
325
WARNING!
A hot engine cooling system is dangerous. You or
others could be badly burned by steam or boiling
coolant. You may want to call a service center if your
vehicle overheats. If you decide to look under the
hood yourself, refer to “Maintenance”, Section 7 of
this manual. Follow the warnings under the “Cooling
System Pressure Cap” paragraph.
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING
During sustained high speed driving or trailer towing up
long grades on hot days, the automatic transaxle oil may
become too hot.
If this happens, the transmission overheat indicator light will come on, and the vehicle will
slow slightly until the automatic transaxle
cools down enough to allow a return to the
6
326
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
requested speed. If the high speed is maintained, the
overheating will reoccur, as before, in a cyclic fashion.
JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING
WARNING!
• Being under a jacked-up vehicle is dangerous. The
vehicle could slip off the jack and fall on you. You
could be crushed. Never put any part of your body
under a vehicle that is on a jack. Never start or run
the engine while the vehicle is on a jack. If you
need to get under a raised vehicle, take it to a
service center where it can be raised on a lift.
WARNING! (Continued)
• The jack is designed to use as a tool for changing
tires only. The jack should not be used to lift the
vehicle for service purposes. The vehicle should
be jacked on a firm level surface only. Avoid ice or
slippery areas.
Jack Location
The jack and jack-handle are stowed under the load floor
in the cargo area.
(Continued)
Spare Tire Stowage
The compact spare tire is stowed under the rear load floor
in the cargo area.
Spare Tire and Jack Stowage
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Spare Tire Removal
Lift up the load floor cover and remove the hold down.
Preparations For Jacking
1. Park the vehicle on a firm level surface, avoiding ice or
slippery areas.
327
5. Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
6. Block both the front and rear of the
wheel diagonally opposite the jacking
position. For example, if changing the
right front tire, block the left rear
wheel.
WARNING!
Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the
vehicle close to moving traffic. Pull far enough off
the road to avoid the danger of being hit when
operating the jack or changing the wheel.
2. Set the parking brake.
3. Place the shift lever in PARK (automatic transaxle) or
REVERSE (manual transaxle).
4. Turn OFF the ignition.
NOTE: Passengers should not remain in the vehicle
while the vehicle is being jacked.
6
Jacking Instructions
WARNING!
Carefully follow these tire changing warnings to
help prevent personal injury or damage to your
vehicle:
(Continued)
328
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Always park on a firm, level surface as far from
the edge of the roadway as possible before raising
the vehicle.
• Block the wheel diagonally opposite the wheel to
be raised.
• Set the parking brake firmly and set an automatic
transmission in PARK; a manual transmission in
REVERSE.
• Never start or run the engine with the vehicle on a
jack.
• Do not let anyone sit in the vehicle when it is on a
jack.
• Do not get under the vehicle when it is on a jack.
• Only use the jack in the positions indicated and
for lifting this vehicle during a tire change.
• If working on or near a roadway, be extremely
careful of motor traffic.
• To assure that spare tires, flat or inflated are
securely stowed, spares must be stowed with the
valve stem facing the ground.
• Turn on the Hazard Warning flasher.
(Continued)
Jack Warning Label
1. Remove the scissors jack and lug wrench from the
spare wheel as an assembly. Turn the jack screw to the left
to loosen the lug wrench and remove the wrench from
the jack assembly.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
2. Loosen, but do not remove, the wheel nuts by turning
them to the left one turn while the wheel is still on the
ground.
329
CAUTION!
Do not attempt to raise the vehicle by jacking on
locations other than those indicated in Step 3.
3. There are two front jacking locations and two rear
jacking locations on each side of the body. The front
locations are outlined by two triangular cutouts, the rear
ones by two rectangular cutouts. For vehicles equipped
with plastic trim, the plastic has been cut away to expose
the jacking locations in the body.
Do not raise the vehicle until you are sure the jack is
securely engaged.
Jacking Locations
4. Turn the jack screw to the left until the jack can be
placed under the jacking location. Once the jack is
positioned, turn the jack screw to the right until the jack
head is properly engaged with the lift area closest to the
wheel to be changed.
6
330
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
WARNING!
Raising the vehicle higher than necessary can make
the vehicle less stable. It could slip off the jack and
hurt someone near it. Raise the vehicle only enough
to remove the tire.
To avoid possible personal injury, handle the wheel
covers with care to avoid contact with any sharp
edges.
5. Using the swivel wrench raise the vehicle by turning
the jack screw to the right. Raise the vehicle only until the
tire just clears the surface and enough clearance is
obtained to install the spare tire. Minimum tire lift
provides maximum stability.
6. Remove the wheel nuts and pull the wheel and wheel
covers, where applicable, off the hub. Install the spare
wheel and wheel nuts with the cone shaped end of the
nuts toward the wheel. Lightly tighten the nuts. To avoid
the risk of forcing the vehicle off the jack, do not tighten
the nuts fully until the vehicle has been lowered.
NOTE: The wheel cover is held on the wheel by the
wheel nuts. When reinstalling the original wheel, properly align the wheel cover to the valve stem, place the
wheel cover onto the wheel, then install the wheel nuts.
7. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack screw to the left.
8. Finish tightening the nuts. Push down on the wrench
while tightening the wheel nuts. Alternate nuts until each
nut has been tightened twice. Correct wheel nut torque is
100 ft lbs (135 N·m). If you doubt that you have tightened
the nuts correctly, have them checked with a torque
wrench by your authorized dealer or service station.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
9. Remove the wheel blocks and lower the jack until it is
free. Reassemble the lug wrench to the jack assembly and
stow it in the spare tire area. Secure the assembly using
the means provided.
WARNING!
A loose tire or jack thrown forward in a collision or
hard stop could endanger the occupants of the vehicle. Always stow the jack parts and the spare tire in
the places provided.
10. Place the deflated (flat) tire in the cargo area, have the
tire repaired or replaced as soon as possible.
331
WARNING!
A loose tire thrown forward in a collision or hard
stop could injure the occupants in the vehicle. Have
the deflated (flat) tire repaired or replaced immediately.
11. Check the tire pressure as soon as possible. Correct
the tire pressure as required.
6
JUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES
WARNING!
• Take care to avoid the radiator cooling fan whenever the hood is raised. It can start anytime the
ignition switch is on. You can be hurt by the fan.
(Continued)
332
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING! (Continued)
• Do not attempt to push or tow your vehicle to get
it started. Vehicles equipped with an automatic
transaxle cannot be started this way and may be
damaged. Unburned fuel could enter the catalytic
converter and once the engine has started, ignite
and damage the converter and vehicle. If the
vehicle has a discharged battery, booster cables
may be used to obtain a start from another vehicle.
This type of start can be dangerous if done improperly, so follow this procedure carefully.
• Wear eye protection and remove any metal jewelry
such as watch bands or bracelets that might make
an inadvertent electrical contact. You could be
seriously injured.
NOTE: Disconnecting the battery with the ignition in
the ON position will cause vehicles with an automatic
transaxle (CVT2) to go into “default mode” and turn on
the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). See your authorized dealer to correct this condition.
1. When boosting from a battery in another vehicle, park
that vehicle within booster cable reach but without
letting the vehicles touch. Set the parking brake, place the
automatic transmission in PARK (the manual transmission in NEUTRAL) and turn the ignition to OFF for both
vehicles.
2. Turn off the heater, radio and all unnecessary electrical
loads.
3. Using the two finger screws on the cover, remove the
air intake duct covering the battery.
4. Connect one end of a jumper cable to the positive
terminal of the booster battery. Connect the other end of
the jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery.
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution; do not
allow battery fluid to contact eyes, skin or clothing. Don’t lean over the battery when attaching the
clamps or allow the clamps to touch each other. If
acid splashes in your eyes or on your skin, flush
the contaminated area immediately with large
quantities of water.
• A battery generates hydrogen gas which is flammable and explosive. Keep flame or spark away
from the vent holes. Do not use a booster battery
or any other booster source with an output that
exceeds 12-Volts.
5. Connect the other cable, first to the negative terminal
of the booster battery and then to the negative terminal of
the discharged battery. Make sure you have a good
contact.
333
6. If the vehicle is equipped with a Sentry Key威 Immobilizer, turn the ignition switch to the ON position for
three seconds before moving the ignition switch to the
START position.
7. Start the engine in the vehicle that has the booster
battery, let the engine idle a few minutes, then start the
engine in the vehicle with the discharged battery.
8. When removing the jumper cables, reverse the sequence exactly. Be careful of the moving belts and fan.
6
FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control or ESP, turn the system OFF before attempting to
“rock” the vehicle.
If your vehicle becomes stuck in mud, sand or snow, it
can often be moved by a rocking motion. Turn your
steering wheel right and left to clear the area around the
334
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
front wheels. Then shift back and forth between REVERSE and 1st gear. Usually the least accelerator pedal
pressure to maintain the rocking motion without spinning the wheels is most effective.
WARNING!
Fast spinning tires can be dangerous. Forces generated by excessive wheel speeds may cause axle, tire
damage or failure. A tire could explode and injure
someone. Do not spin your vehicle’s wheels faster
than 30 mph (48 km/h) or for longer than 30 seconds
continuously without stopping when you are stuck.
And don’t let anyone near a spinning wheel, no
matter what the speed.
CAUTION!
Racing the engine or spinning the wheels too fast
may lead to transaxle overheating and failure. It can
also damage the tires. Do not spin the wheels above
30 mph (48 km/h). Do not spin the wheels continuously for more than 30 seconds.
TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE
With Ignition Key
Automatic Transaxle
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) vehicles can be towed with
the front wheels elevated or on a flatbed truck (all four
wheels off the ground).
• All Wheel Drive (AWD) vehicles must be towed on a
flatbed truck (all four wheels off the ground).
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
CAUTION!
DO NOT flat tow any vehicle equipped with an
automatic transmission. Damage to the drivetrain
will result.
Manual Transaxle
• Front Wheel Drive (FWD) or All Wheel Drive (AWD)
vehicles can be flat towed (all four wheels on the
ground) with the transmission in NEUTRAL.
• FWD vehicles can be towed with the front wheels
elevated.
• FWD or AWD vehicles can be towed on a flatbed truck
(all wheels off the ground).
335
All Transaxles
If it is necessary to use the accessories while being towed
(wipers, defrosters, etc.), the key must be in the ON
position, not the ACC position. Make certain the transmission remains in NEUTRAL.
CAUTION!
• If the vehicle being towed requires steering, the
ignition switch must be in the ACC position, not
in the LOCK position.
• Do not attempt to use sling type equipment when
towing. When securing the vehicle to a flat bed
truck, do not attach to front or rear suspension
components. Damage to your vehicle may result
from improper towing.
6
336
WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES
Without The Ignition Key
Special care must be taken when the vehicle is towed
with the ignition in the LOCK position. A dolly should be
used under the front wheels if the rear wheels are raised.
Proper towing equipment is necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle.
Battery power is required to release the brake/
transmission interlock system. There is a removable plug
in the right side of the shift lever housing that allows you
to insert your finger to override the system. The ignition
key must be in the ON position to use the override lever.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CONTENTS
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.0L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 339
▫ Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
䡵 Engine Compartment — 2.4L . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
▫ Engine Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
䡵 Onboard Diagnostic System — OBD II . . . . . . 341
▫ Engine Air Cleaner Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
▫ Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message . . . . . . . . . . . 341
▫ Maintenance-Free Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
䡵 Emissions Inspection And Maintenance
Programs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 342
▫ Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
䡵 Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
䡵 Maintenance Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
▫ Body Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Windshield Wiper Blades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
▫ Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
▫ Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
7
338
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
▫ Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
▫ Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
▫ Automatic Transaxle (CVT) — If Equipped . . 361
▫ Manual Transaxle — If Equipped . . . . . . . . . 362
▫ Appearance Care And Protection From
Corrosion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
䡵 Fuses . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
▫ Integrated Power Module (IPM) . . . . . . . . . . 368
䡵 Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
䡵 Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
䡵 Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Headlights/Front Parking/Front
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
▫ Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals And Backup
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
▫ License Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
▫ Center High-Mounted Stoplight . . . . . . . . . . 376
䡵 Fluids And Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
䡵 Fluids, Lubricants, And Genuine Parts . . . . . . . 378
▫ Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
▫ Chassis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
339
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.0L
7
1
2
3
4
5
— Washer Fluid Reservoir
— Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
— Engine Oil Fill
— Air Cleaner Filter
— Brake Fluid Reservoir
6 — Integrated Power Module
7 — Battery (Under Cover)
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
340
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ENGINE COMPARTMENT — 2.4L
1
2
3
4
5
—
—
—
—
—
Washer Fluid Reservoir
Power Steering Fluid Reservoir
Engine Oil Fill
Brake Fluid Reservoir
Integrated Power Module
6 — Battery
7 — Air Cleaner Filter
8 — Coolant Pressure Cap
9 — Engine Oil Dipstick
10 — Engine Coolant Reservoir
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM — OBD II
Your vehicle is equipped with a sophisticated Onboard
Diagnostic system called OBD II. This system monitors
the performance of the emissions, engine, and automatic
transaxle control systems. When these systems are operating properly, your vehicle will provide excellent performance and fuel economy, as well as engine emissions
well within current government regulations.
If any of these systems require service, the OBD II system
will turn on the Malfunction Indicator Light (MIL). It will
also store diagnostic codes and other information to
assist your service technician in making repairs. Although your vehicle will usually be drivable and not
need towing, see your authorized dealer for service as
soon as possible.
341
CAUTION!
• Prolonged driving with the MIL on could cause
further damage to the emission control system. It
could also affect fuel economy and drivability. The
vehicle must be serviced before any emissions
tests can be performed.
• If the MIL is flashing while the engine is running,
severe catalytic converter damage and power loss
will soon occur. Immediate service is required.
Loose Fuel Filler Cap Message
After fuel is added, the vehicle diagnostic system can
determine if the fuel filler cap is possibly loose or
improperly installed. A “gASCAP” message will be displayed in the instrument cluster. Tighten the gas cap until
a ⬙clicking⬙ sound is heard. This is an indication that the
gas cap is properly tightened. Press the trip odometer
RESET button to turn off the message. If the problem
7
342
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
persists, the message will appear the next time the
vehicle is started. This might indicate a damaged cap. If
the problem is detected twice in a row, the system will
turn on the MIL. Resolving the problem will turn the MIL
light off.
EMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
PROGRAMS
In some localities, it may be a legal requirement to pass
an inspection of your vehicle’s emissions control system.
Failure to pass could prevent vehicle registration.
For states that require an Inspection and Maintenance (I/M), this check verifies the Malfunction
Indicator Light (MIL) is functioning and is not on
when the engine is running, and that the OBD II system
is ready for testing.
Normally, the OBD II system will be ready. The OBD II
system may not be ready if your vehicle was recently
serviced, recently had a dead battery or a battery replacement. If the OBD II system should be determined not
ready for the I/M test, your vehicle may fail the test.
Your vehicle has a simple ignition key-actuated test,
which you can use prior to going to the test station. To
check if your vehicle’s OBD II system is ready, you must
do the following:
1. Insert your ignition key into the ignition switch.
2. Turn the ignition to the ON position, but do not crank
or start the engine.
3. If you crank or start the engine, you will have to start
this test over.
4. As soon as you turn your key to the ON position, you
will see the MIL symbol come on as part of a normal bulb
check.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
5. Approximately 15 seconds later, one of two things will
happen:
a. The MIL will flash for about 10 seconds and then
return to being fully illuminated until you turn OFF
the ignition or start the engine. This means that your
vehicle’s OBD II system is not ready and you should
not proceed to the I/M station.
b. The MIL will not flash at all and will remain fully
illuminated until you turn OFF the ignition or start the
engine. This means that your vehicle’s OBD II system
is ready and you can proceed to the I/M station.
If your OBD II system is not ready, you should see your
authorized dealer or repair facility. If your vehicle was
recently serviced or had a battery failure or replacement,
you may need to do nothing more than drive your
vehicle as you normally would in order for your OBD II
system to update. A recheck with the above test routine
may then indicate that the system is now ready.
343
Regardless of whether your vehicle’s OBD II system is
ready or not, if the MIL is illuminated during normal
vehicle operation you should have your vehicle serviced
before going to the I/M station. The I/M station can fail
your vehicle because the MIL is on with the engine
running.
REPLACEMENT PARTS
Use of genuine MOPAR威 parts for normal/scheduled
maintenance and repairs is highly recommended to ensure the designed performance. Damage or failures
caused by the use of non-MOPAR威 parts for maintenance
and repairs will not be covered by the manufacturer’s
warranty.
DEALER SERVICE
Your authorized dealer has the qualified service personnel, special tools, and equipment to perform all service
operations in an expert manner. Service Manuals are
available which include detailed service information for
7
344
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
your vehicle. Refer to these manuals before attempting
any procedure yourself.
NOTE: Intentional tampering with emissions control
systems can result in civil penalties being assessed
against you.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Only do service work for which you
have the knowledge and the proper equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES
The pages that follow contain the required maintenance
services determined by the engineers who designed your
vehicle.
Besides the maintenance items for which there are fixed
maintenance intervals, there are other items that should
operate satisfactorily without periodic maintenance.
However, if a malfunction of these items does occur, it
could adversely affect the engine or vehicle performance.
These items should be inspected if a malfunction is
observed or suspected.
Engine Oil
Checking Oil Level
To assure proper engine lubrication, the engine oil must
be maintained at the correct level. Check the oil level at
regular intervals, such as every fuel stop.
The best time to check the engine oil level is about five
minutes after a fully warmed engine is shut off. Do not
check oil level before starting the engine after it has sat
overnight. Checking engine oil level when the engine is
cold will give you an incorrect reading.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Checking the oil while the vehicle is on level ground and
only when the engine is hot, will improve the accuracy of
the oil level readings. Maintain the oil level between the
range markings on the dipstick. The range markings will
consist of a crosshatch zone that says SAFE or a crosshatch zone that says MIN at the low end of the range and
MAX at the high end of the range. Adding 1 qt (1L) of oil
when the reading is at the low end of the indicated range
will result in the oil level at the full end of the indicator
range.
345
Change Engine Oil
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
recommended engine oil change intervals.
Engine Oil Selection
For best performance and maximum protection for all
engines under all types of operating conditions, the
manufacturer recommends engine oils that are API Certified and meet the requirements of Chrysler Material
Standard MS-6395.
CAUTION!
Do not overfill the engine. Overfilling the engine as
indicated by the range markings, as described above,
on the engine oil dipstick will cause oil aeration,
which can lead to loss of oil pressure and an increase
in oil temperature. This could damage your engine.
7
346
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
American Petroleum Institute (API) Engine Oil
Identification Symbol
This symbol means that the oil has
been certified by the American
Petroleum Institute (API). The
manufacturer only recommends
API Certified engine oils.
Engine Oil Viscosity (SAE Grade)
SAE 5W-20 engine oil is recommended for all operating
temperatures. This engine oil improves low temperature
starting and vehicle fuel economy. Your engine oil filler
cap also states the recommended engine oil viscosity
grade for your engine.
Lubricants which do not have both the engine oil certification mark and the correct SAE viscosity grade number should not be used.
Synthetic Engine Oils
You may use synthetic engine oils provided the recommended oil quality requirements are met, and the recommended maintenance intervals for oil and filter changes
are followed.
Materials Added To Engine Oils
The manufacturer strongly recommends against the addition of any additives (other than leak detection dyes) to
the engine oil. Engine oil is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Disposing Of Used Engine Oil and Oil Filters
Care should be taken in disposing of used engine oil and
oil filtersfrom your vehicle. Used oil and oil filters,
indiscriminately discarded, can present a problem to the
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
environment. Contact your authorized dealer, service
station, or governmental agency for advice on how and
where used oil and oil filters can be safely discarded in
your area.
Engine Oil Filter
The engine oil filter should be replaced at every engine
oil change.
Engine Oil Filter Selection
All of this manufacturer’s engines have a full-flow type
disposable oil filter. Use a filter of this type for replacement. The quality of replacement filters varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be used to assure
most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine oil filters are high
quality oil filters and are recommended.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
proper maintenance interval.
347
WARNING!
The air cleaner can provide a measure of protection
in the case of engine backfire. Do not remove the air
cleaner unless such removal is necessary for repair or
maintenance. Make sure that no one is near the
engine compartment before starting the vehicle with
the air cleaner removed. Failure to do so can result in
serious personal injury.
Engine Air Cleaner Filter Selection
The quality of replacement engine air cleaner filters
varies considerably. Only high quality filters should be
used to assure most efficient service. MOPAR威 engine air
cleaner filters are a high quality filter and are
recommended.
7
348
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Maintenance-Free Battery
The top of the maintenance-free battery is permanently
sealed. You will never have to add water, nor is periodic
maintenance required.
WARNING!
• Battery fluid is a corrosive acid solution and can
burn or even blind you. Do not allow battery fluid
to contact your eyes, skin, or clothing. Do not lean
over a battery when attaching clamps. If acid
splashes in eyes or on skin, flush the area immediately with large amounts of water.
• Battery gas is flammable and explosive. Keep
flame or sparks away from the battery. Do not use
a booster battery or any other booster source with
an output greater than 12 Volts. Do not allow cable
clamps to touch each other.
(Continued)
WARNING! (Continued)
• Battery posts, terminals, and related accessories
contain lead and lead compounds. Wash hands
after handling.
• The battery in this vehicle has a vent hose that
should not be disconnected and should only be
replaced with a battery of the same type (vented).
CAUTION!
• It is essential when replacing the cables on the
battery that the positive cable is attached to the
positive post and the negative cable is attached to
the negative post. Battery posts are marked positive (+) and negative (-) and identified on the
battery case. Cable clamps should be tight on the
terminal posts and free of corrosion.
(Continued)
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
349
CAUTION! (Continued)
WARNING!
• If a “fast charger” is used while the battery is in
the vehicle, disconnect both vehicle battery cables
before connecting the charger to the battery. Do
not use a “fast charger” to provide starting voltage.
• Use only refrigerants and compressor lubricants
approved by the manufacturer for your air conditioning system. Some unapproved refrigerants are
flammable and can explode, injuring you. Other
unapproved refrigerants or lubricants can cause
the system to fail, requiring costly repairs. Refer to
Section 3 of the Warranty Information Book for
further warranty information.
• The air conditioning system contains refrigerant
under high pressure. To avoid risk of personal
injury or damage to the system, adding refrigerant
or any repair requiring lines to be disconnected
should be done by an experienced repairman.
Air Conditioner Maintenance
For best possible performance, your air conditioner
should be checked and serviced by an authorized dealer
at the start of each warm season. This service should
include cleaning of the condenser fins and a performance
test. Drive belt tension should also be checked at this
time.
7
350
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Refrigerant Recovery And Recycling
R-134a air conditioning refrigerant is a hydrofluorocarbon (HFC) that is endorsed by the Environmental
Protection Agency and is an ozone-saving product. However, the manufacturer recommends that air conditioning
service be performed by authorized dealers or other
service facilities using recovery and recycling equipment.
NOTE: Use only manufacturer approved A/C system
sealers, stop leak products, seal conditioners, compressor
oil, or refrigerants.
Body Lubrication
Locks and all body pivot points, including such items as
seat tracks, door hinge pivot points and rollers, liftgate,
tailgate, sliding doors and hood hinges, should be lubricated periodically with a lithium based grease such as
MOPAR威 Spray White Lube to assure quiet, easy operation and to protect against rust and wear. Prior to the
application of any lubricant, the parts concerned should
be wiped clean to remove dust and grit; after lubricating
excess oil and grease should be removed. Particular
attention should also be given to hood latching components to insure proper function. When performing other
underhood services, the hood latch, release mechanism
and safety catch should be cleaned and lubricated.
The external lock cylinders should be lubricated twice a
year, preferably in the Fall and Spring. Apply a small
amount of a high quality lubricant such as MOPAR威
Lock Cylinder Lubricant directly into the lock cylinder.
Windshield Wiper Blades
Clean the rubber edges of the wiper blades and the
windshield periodically with a sponge or soft cloth and a
mild, nonabrasive cleaner or use the washer solvent. This
will remove accumulations of salt, waxes or road film
and help reduce streaking and smearing.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Operation of the wipers on dry glass for long periods
may cause deterioration of the wiper blades. Always use
washer fluid when using the wipers to remove salt or dirt
from a dry windshield. Avoid using the wiper blades to
remove frost or ice from the windshield. Make sure that
they are not frozen to the glass before turning them on to
avoid damaging the blade. Keep the blade rubber out of
contact with petroleum products such as engine oil,
gasoline, etc.
Adding Washer Fluid
The windshield washer fluid reservoir is located in the
engine compartment (right rear side), and the fluid level
should be checked at regular intervals. Fill the reservoir
with windshield washer solvent (not engine coolant
(antifreeze).
351
WARNING!
Commercially available windshield washer solvents
are flammable. They could ignite and burn you. Care
must be exercised when filling or working around
the washer solution.
Exhaust System
The best protection against carbon monoxide entry into
the vehicle body is a properly maintained engine exhaust
system.
If you notice a change in the sound of the exhaust system,
or if exhaust fumes can be detected inside the vehicle or
when the underside or rear of the vehicle is damaged,
have a competent technician inspect the complete exhaust system and adjacent body areas for broken, damaged, deteriorated, or mispositioned parts. Open seams
or loose connections could permit exhaust fumes to seep
into the passenger compartment. In addition, inspect the
7
352
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
exhaust system each time the vehicle is raised for an oil
change or lubrication. Replace as required.
WARNING!
Exhaust gases can injure or kill. They contain carbon
monoxide (CO) which is colorless and odorless.
Breathing it can make you unconscious and can
eventually poison you. To avoid breathing CO, refer
to “Exhaust Gas” in the Safety Tips section of this
manual.
The catalytic converter requires the use of unleaded fuel
only. Leaded gasoline will destroy the effectiveness of the
catalyst as an emission control device.
Under normal operating conditions, the catalytic converter will not require maintenance. However, it is important to keep the engine properly tuned to assure
proper catalyst operation and prevent possible catalyst
damage.
CAUTION!
Damage to the catalytic converter can result if your
vehicle is not kept in proper operating condition. In
the event of engine malfunction, particularly involving engine misfire or other apparent loss of performance, have your vehicle serviced promptly. Continued operation of your vehicle with a severe
malfunction could cause the converter to overheat,
resulting in possible damage to the converter and the
vehicle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
A hot exhaust system can start a fire if you park over
materials that can burn. Such materials might be
grass or leaves coming into contact with your exhaust
system. Do not park or operate your vehicle in areas
where your exhaust system can contact anything that
can burn.
In unusual situations involving grossly malfunctioning
engine operation, a scorching odor may suggest severe
and abnormal catalyst overheating. If this occurs, stop
the vehicle, turn off the engine and allow it to cool.
Service, including a tune up to manufacturers specifications, should be obtained immediately.
353
To minimize the possibility of catalyst damage:
• Do not shut off the engine or interrupt the ignition
when the transaxle is in gear and the vehicle is in
motion.
• Do not try to start the engine by pushing or towing the
vehicle.
• Do not idle the engine with any spark plug wires
disconnected for a prolonged period.
Cooling System
WARNING!
• When working near the radiator cooling fan, disconnect the fan motor lead or turn the ignition
switch to the OFF position. The fan is temperature
controlled and can start at any time the ignition
switch is in the ON position.
(Continued)
7
354
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING! (Continued)
• You or others can be badly burned by hot coolant
or steam from your radiator. If you see or hear
steam coming from under the hood, do not open
the hood until the radiator has had time to cool.
Never try to open a cooling system pressure cap
when the radiator is hot.
Coolant Checks
Check engine coolant (antifreeze) protection every
12 months (before the onset of freezing weather, where
applicable). If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or
rusty in appearance, the system should be drained,
flushed and refilled with fresh engine coolant (antifreeze). Check the front of the A/C condenser for any
accumulation of bugs, leaves, etc. If dirty, clean by gently
spraying water from a garden hose vertically down the
face of the condenser.
Check the coolant recovery bottle tubing for brittle rubber, cracking, tears, cuts and tightness of the connection
at the bottle and radiator. Inspect the entire system for
leaks.
Cooling System — Drain, Flush And Refill
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.
If the engine coolant (antifreeze) is dirty or contains a
considerable amount of sediment, clean and flush with a
reliable cooling system cleaner. Follow with a thorough
rinsing to remove all deposits and chemicals. Properly
dispose of old engine coolant (antifreeze).
Selection Of Coolant
Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
355
CAUTION!
CAUTION! (Continued)
• Mixing of engine coolant (antifreeze) other than
specified Hybrid Organic Additive Technology
(HOAT) engine coolant (antifreeze), may result in
engine damage and may decrease corrosion protection. If a non-HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze)
is introduced into the cooling system in an emergency, it should be replaced with the specified
engine coolant (antifreeze) as soon as possible.
• Do not use water alone or alcohol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) products. Do not use additional rust inhibitors or antirust products, as they
may not be compatible with the radiator engine
coolant and may plug the radiator.
• This vehicle has not been designed for use with
Propylene Glycol based engine coolant (antifreeze). Use of Propylene Glycol based engine
coolant (antifreeze) is not recommended.
(Continued)
Adding Coolant
Your vehicle has been built with an improved engine
coolant (antifreeze) that allows extended maintenance
intervals. This engine coolant (antifreeze) can be used up
to five years or 102,000 miles (170 000 km) before
replacement. To prevent reducing this extended maintenance period, it is important that you use the same
engine coolant (antifreeze) throughout the life of your
vehicle. Please review these recommendations for using
Hybrid Organic Additive Technology (HOAT) engine
coolant (antifreeze).
7
356
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
When adding engine coolant (antifreeze), a minimum
solution of 50% recommended MOPAR威 Antifreeze/
Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology), or equivalent, in water
should be used. Use higher concentrations (not to exceed
70%) if temperatures below ⫺34°F (⫺37°C) are anticipated.
Use only high purity water such as distilled or deionized
water when mixing the water/engine coolant (antifreeze)
solution. The use of lower quality water will reduce the
amount of corrosion protection in the engine cooling
system.
Please note that it is the owner’s responsibility to maintain the proper level of protection against freezing according to the temperatures occurring in the area where
the vehicle is operated.
NOTE: Mixing engine coolant (antifreeze) types will
decrease the life of the engine coolant (antifreeze) and
will require more frequent coolant changes.
Cooling System Pressure Cap
The cap must be fully tightened to prevent loss of engine
coolant (antifreeze) and to ensure that engine coolant
(antifreeze) will return to the radiator from the coolant
recovery bottle.
The cap should be inspected and cleaned if there is any
accumulation of foreign material on the sealing surfaces.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
WARNING!
• The warning words “DO NOT OPEN HOT” on
the cooling system pressure cap are a safety precaution. Never add engine coolant (antifreeze)
when the engine is overheated. Do not loosen or
remove the cap to cool an overheated engine. Heat
causes pressure to build up in the cooling system.
To prevent scalding or injury, do not remove the
pressure cap while the system is hot or under
pressure.
• Do not use a pressure cap other than the one
specified for your vehicle. Personal injury or engine damage may result.
Disposal Of Used Engine Coolant
Used ethylene glycol-based engine coolant (antifreeze) is
a regulated substance requiring proper disposal. Check
with your local authorities to determine the disposal
357
rules for your community. To prevent ingestion by animals or children do not store ethylene glycol-based
engine coolant (antifreeze) in open containers or allow it
to remain in puddles on the ground. If ingested by a
child, contact a physician immediately. Clean up any
ground spills immediately.
Coolant Level
The coolant bottle provides a quick visual method for
determining that the coolant level is adequate. With the
engine idling and warm to normal operating temperature, the level of the engine coolant (antifreeze) in the
bottle should be between the “ADD” and “FULL” lines
shown on the bottle.
The radiator normally remains completely full, so there is
no need to remove the radiator cap unless checking for
the coolant freeze point or replacing the engine coolant
(antifreeze). Advise your service attendant of this. As
7
358
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
long as the engine operating temperature is satisfactory,
the coolant bottle need only be checked once a month.
When additional engine coolant (antifreeze) is needed to
maintain the proper level, it should be added to the
coolant bottle. Do not overfill.
Points to Remember
NOTE: When the vehicle is stopped after a few miles/
kilometers of operation, you may observe vapor coming
from the front of the engine compartment. This is normally a result of moisture from rain, snow, or high
humidity accumulating on the radiator and being vaporized when the thermostat opens, allowing hot engine
coolant (antifreeze) to enter the radiator.
If an examination of your engine compartment shows no
evidence of radiator or hose leaks, the vehicle may be
safely driven. The vapor will soon dissipate.
• Do not overfill the coolant recovery bottle.
• Check the coolant freeze point in the radiator and in
the coolant recovery bottle. If engine coolant (antifreeze) needs to be added, the contents of the coolant
recovery bottle must also be protected against freezing.
• If frequent engine coolant (antifreeze) additions are
required, or if the level in the coolant recovery bottle
does not drop when the engine cools, the cooling
system should be pressure tested for leaks.
• Maintain engine coolant (antifreeze) concentration at
50% HOAT engine coolant (antifreeze) (minimum)
and distilled water for proper corrosion protection of
your engine which contains aluminum components.
• Make sure that the radiator and coolant recovery
bottle overflow hoses are not kinked or obstructed.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
• Keep the front of the radiator clean. If your vehicle is
equipped with air conditioning, keep the front of the
condenser clean.
• Do not change the thermostat for Summer or Winter
operation. If replacement is ever necessary, install
ONLY the correct type thermostat. Other designs may
result in unsatisfactory engine coolant (antifreeze)
performance, poor gas mileage, and increased
emissions.
Brake System
In order to assure brake system performance, all brake
system components should be inspected periodically.
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for
proper maintenance intervals.
359
WARNING!
Riding the brakes can lead to brake failure and
possibly an accident. Driving with your foot resting
or riding on the brake pedal can result in abnormally
high brake temperatures, excessive lining wear, and
possible brake damage. You would not have your full
braking capacity in an emergency.
Brake Master Cylinder
The fluid level in the master cylinder should be checked
when performing under hood services, or immediately if
the brake system warning light is on.
Be sure to clean the top of the master cylinder area before
removing the cap. If necessary, add fluid to bring the
fluid level up to the requirements described on the brake
fluid reservoir. Fluid level can be expected to fall as the
brake pads wear. The brake fluid level should be checked
7
360
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
when the pads are replaced. However, low fluid level
may be caused by a leak and a checkup may be needed.
NOTE: If your vehicle is equipped with a manual
transaxle , the brake fluid reservoir supplies fluid to both
the brake system and the clutch release system. The two
systems are separated in the reservoir, and a leak in one
system will not affect the other system. The manual
transaxle clutch release system should not require fluid
replacement during the life of the vehicle. If the brake
fluid reservoir is low and the brake system does not
indicate any leaks or other problems, it may be a result of
a leak in the hydraulic clutch release system. See your
local authorized dealer for service.
Use only manufacturer’s recommended brake fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this
section for the correct fluid type.
WARNING!
• Use of a brake fluid that may have a lower initial
boiling point or is unidentified as to specification,
may result in sudden brake failure during hard
prolonged braking. You could have an accident.
• Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result in
spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the
brake fluid catching fire.
CAUTION!
Use of improper brake fluids will affect overall
clutch system performance. Improper brake fluids
may damage the clutch system resulting in loss of
clutch function and the ability to shift the transaxle.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Use only brake fluid that has been in a tightly closed
container to avoid contamination from foreign matter.
NOTE: Do not allow petroleum-based fluid to contaminate the brake fluid as seal damage will result!
Automatic Transaxle (CVT) — If Equipped
Selection Of Lubricant
It is important that the proper lubricant is used in the
transaxle to assure optimum transaxle performance. Use
only the manufacturer’s recommended transmission
fluid which has been formulated with special metal to
metal friction coefficient additives to provide the proper
steel belt traction on the drive and driven pulleys. Refer
to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section
for the correct fluid type.
361
CAUTION!
Using a transmission fluid other than the manufacturer’s recommended fluid will cause belt slip and
result in a complete transmission failure! Refer to
“Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in this section for the correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
The fluid level in the automatic transaxle should be
checked only by a trained technician.
Fluid And Filter Changes
Refer to the “Maintenance Schedule” in Section 8 for the
correct maintenance interval.
Special Additives
Do not add any materials (other than leak detection dyes)
to Continuously Variable Transaxle (CVT) Fluid
7
362
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
(CVTF+4). CVTF+4 is an engineered product and its
performance may be impaired by supplemental
additives.
Manual Transaxle — If Equipped
Lubricant Selection
Use only the manufacturers recommended transmission
fluid. Refer to “Fluids, Lubricants, and Genuine Parts” in
this section for the correct fluid type.
Fluid Level Check
Check the fluid level by removing the fill plug. The fluid
level should be between the bottom of the fill hole and a
point not more that 3/16 in (4.7 mm) below the bottom of
the hole.
Add fluid, if necessary, to maintain the proper level.
Frequency Of Fluid Change
Under normal operating conditions, the fluid installed at
the factory will give satisfactory lubrication for the life of
the vehicle. Fluid changes are not necessary unless lubricant has become contaminated with water.
NOTE: If contaminated with water, the fluid should be
changed immediately.
Appearance Care And Protection From Corrosion
Protection Of Body And Paint From Corrosion
Vehicle body care requirements vary according to geographic locations and usage. Chemicals that make roads
passable in snow and ice and those that are sprayed on
trees and road surfaces during other seasons, are highly
corrosive to the metal in your vehicle. Outside parking,
which exposes your vehicle to airborne contaminants,
road surfaces on which the vehicle is operated, extreme
hot or cold weather and other extreme conditions will
have an adverse effect on paint, metal trim, and underbody protection.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
The following maintenance recommendations will enable
you to obtain maximum benefit from the corrosion
resistance built into your vehicle.
What Causes Corrosion?
Corrosion is the result of deterioration or removal of
paint and protective coatings from your vehicle.
The most common causes of corrosion are:
• Road salt, dirt and moisture accumulation.
• Stone and gravel impact.
• Insects, tree sap and tar.
• Salt in the air near sea coast localities.
• Atmospheric fallout/industrial pollutants.
363
Washing
• Wash your vehicle regularly. Always wash your vehicle in the shade using MOPAR威 Car Wash or a mild
car wash soap, and rinse the panels completely with
clear water.
• If insects, tar or other similar deposits have accumulated on your vehicle, use MOPAR威 Super Kleen Bug
and Tar Remover to remove.
• Use MOPAR威 Cleaner Wax to remove road film, stains
and to protect your paint finish. Take care never to
scratch the paint.
• Avoid using abrasive compounds and power buffing
that may diminish the gloss or thin out the paint
finish.
7
364
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
Do not use abrasive or strong cleaning materials such
as steel wool or scouring powder, which will scratch
metal and painted surfaces.
Special Care
• If you drive on salted or dusty roads or if you drive
near the ocean, hose off the undercarriage at least once
a month.
• It is important that the drain holes in the lower edges
of the doors, rocker panels and trunk be kept clear and
open.
• If you detect any stone chips or scratches in the paint,
touch them up immediately. The cost of such repairs is
considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If your vehicle is damaged due to an accident or
similar cause which destroys the paint and protective
coating, have your vehicle repaired as soon as possible. The cost of such repairs is considered the responsibility of the owner.
• If you carry special cargo such as chemicals, fertilizers,
de-icer salt, etc., be sure that such materials are well
packaged and sealed.
• If a lot of driving is done on gravel roads, consider
mud or stone shields behind each wheel.
• Use MOPAR威 Touch Up Paint on scratches as soon as
possible. Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to
match the color of your vehicle.
Wheel And Wheel Trim Care
All wheels and wheel trim, especially aluminum and
chrome plated wheels, should be cleaned regularly with
a mild soap and water to prevent corrosion. To remove
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
heavy soil, use MOPAR威 Wheel Cleaner or select a
nonabrasive, non-acidic cleaner. Do not use scouring
pads, steel wool, a bristle brush or metal polishes. Only
MOPAR威 cleaners are recommended. Do not use oven
cleaner. Avoid automatic car washes that use acidic
solutions or harsh brushes that may damage the wheels’
protective finish.
Stain Repel Fabric Cleaning Procedure — If
Equipped
You can identify if your vehicle has Stain Repel Seat
Fabric that makes spills easy to clean, reduces odor from
spills and reduces static by the presence of a tag on the
side of the seat.
365
• Blot any remaining stain with a clean, damp towel.
• For tough stains, apply MOPAR威 Total Clean or a mild
soap solution to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain.
Use a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• For grease stains, apply MOPAR威 Multi-Purpose
Cleaner to a clean, damp cloth and remove stain. Use
a fresh, damp towel to remove soap residue.
• Do not use any solvents or protectants on Stain Repel
products.
Interior Care
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean fabric upholstery and
carpeting.
Stain Repel seats may be cleaned in the following manner:
Use MOPAR威 Total Clean to clean vinyl upholstery.
• Remove as much of the stain as possible by blotting
with a clean, dry towel.
MOPAR威 Total Clean is specifically recommended for
leather upholstery.
7
366
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Your leather upholstery can be best preserved by regular
cleaning with a damp, soft cloth. Small particles of dirt
can act as an abrasive and damage the leather upholstery
and should be removed promptly with a damp cloth.
Stubborn soils can be removed easily with a soft cloth
and MOPAR威 Total Clean. Care should be taken to avoid
soaking your leather upholstery with any liquid. Please
do not use polishes, oils, cleaning fluids, solvents, detergents, or ammonia based cleaners to clean your leather
upholstery. Application of a leather conditioner is not
required to maintain the original condition.
WARNING!
Do not use volatile solvents for cleaning purposes.
Many are potentially flammable, and if used in
closed areas, they may cause respiratory harm.
Cleaning Headlights
Your vehicle has plastic headlights that are lighter and
less susceptible to stone breakage than glass headlights.
Plastic is not as scratch resistant as glass and, therefore,
different lens cleaning procedures must be followed.
To minimize the possibility of scratching the lenses and
reducing light output, avoid wiping with a dry cloth. To
remove road dirt, wash with a mild soap solution followed by rinsing.
Do not use abrasive cleaning components, solvents, steel
wool or other aggressive material to clean the lenses.
Glass Surfaces
All glass surfaces should be cleaned on a regular basis
with MOPAR威 Glass Cleaner or any commercial
household-type glass cleaner. Never use an abrasive type
cleaner. Use caution when cleaning the inside rear window equipped with electric defrosters or the right rear
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
quarter window equipped with the radio antenna. Do
not use scrapers or other sharp instruments which may
scratch the elements. When cleaning the rearview mirror,
spray cleaner on the towel or rag that you are using. Do
not spray cleaner directly on the mirror.
Instrument Panel Cover
The instrument panel cover has a low glare surface which
minimizes reflections on the windshield. Do not use
protectants or other products which may cause undesirable reflections. Use soap and warm water to restore the
low glare surface.
367
Instrument Panel Bezels
CAUTION!
When installing hanging air fresheners in your vehicle, read the installation instructions carefully.
Some air fresheners will damage the finish of
painted or decorated parts if allowed to directly
contact any surface.
Cleaning Plastic Instrument Cluster Lenses
The lenses in front of the instruments in this vehicle are
molded in clear plastic. When cleaning the lenses, care
must be taken to avoid scratching the plastic.
1. Clean with a wet, soft rag. A mild soap solution may
be used, but do not use high alcohol content or abrasive
cleaners. If soap is used, wipe clean with a clean, damp
rag.
2. Dry with a soft cloth.
7
368
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Seat Belt Maintenance
Do not bleach, dye or clean the seat belts with chemical
solvents or abrasive cleaners. This will weaken the fabric.
Sun damage can also weaken the fabric.
If the seat belts need cleaning, use a mild soap solution or
lukewarm water. Do not remove the seat belts from the
car to wash them.
Replace the seat belts if they appear frayed or worn or if
the buckles do not work properly.
Dry with a soft cloth.
FUSES
Integrated Power Module (IPM)
The Integrated Power Module (IPM) is located in the
engine compartment near the air cleaner assembly. This
center contains cartridge fuses and mini-fuses. A label
that identifies each component may be printed on the
inside of the cover. Refer to “Engine Compartment” in
this section of the Owner’s Manual for the underhood
location of the IPM.
Cavity Cartridge
MiniFuse
Fuse
1
Empty
2
15 Amp
Lt Blue
3
10 Amp
Red
4
10 Amp
Red
5
20 Amp
Yellow
6
10 Amp
Red
7
30 Amp
Green
Description
Empty
AWD/4WD ECU
Feed
CHMSL Brake Switch
Feed
Ignition Switch Feed/
OCM
Trailer Tow
IOD Sw/Pwr Mir/
Steering Cntrl Sdar/
Hands-Free Phone
IOD Sense1
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
MiniFuse
Fuse
8
30 Amp
Green
9
40 Amp
Green
10
20 Amp
Yellow
11
15 Amp
Lt Blue
12
20 Amp
Yellow
13
20 Amp
Yellow
14
15
10 Amp
Red
40 Amp
Green
Description
IOD Sense2
Cavity Cartridge
MiniFuse
Fuse
16
15 Amp
Lt Blue
Power Seats
CCN Power Locks/
Interior Lighting
Power Outlet
17
Ign Run/Acc Inverter
19
Pwr Run/Acc Outlet
RR/Dome Lamp/
Cigar Lighter
IOD CCN
20
RAD Fan Relay Battery Feed
22
18
21
10 Amp
Red
40 Amp
Green
20 Amp
Yellow
15 Amp
Lt Blue
10 Amp
Red
10 Amp
Red
369
Description
IGN Run/Acc Dome
Lamp/Sunroof/Rear
Wiper Motor/ACC
Inverter
IOD Feed Mod-Wcm
ASD Relay Contact
PWR Feed
PWR Amp 1 & Amp
2 Feed
IOD Feed Radio
IOD Feed Intrus
Mod/Siren (If
Equipped)
IGN RUN Heat/AC/
Compass Sensor
7
370
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Cavity Cartridge
MiniFuse
Fuse
23
15 Amp
Lt Blue
24
15 Amp
Lt Blue
25
10 Amp
Red
26
15 Amp
Lt Blue
27
10 Amp
Red
28
10 Amp
Red
29
30
20 Amp
Yellow
Description
ENG ASD Relay Feed
3
Power Sunroof Feed
Cavity Cartridge
MiniFuse
Fuse
31
10 Amp
Red
32
Heated Mirror (If
Equipped)
ENG ASD Relay Feed
2
IGN RUN Only ORC
Feed
IGN RUN ORC/OCM
Feed
Hot Car (No Fuse Required)
Heated Seat (If
Equipped)
30 Amp
Pink
33
34
35
36
37
10 Amp
Red
30 Amp
Pink
40 Amp
Green
30 Amp
Pink
Description
Headlamp Washer
Relay Control (If
Equipped)
ENG ASD Control
Feed 1
ABS MOD/J1962
Conn/PCM
ABS Valve Feed
ABS Pump Feed
25 Amp
Natural
Headlamp/Washer
Control/Smart Glass
(If Equipped)
Diesel Fuel Heater —
If Equipped
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
CAUTION!
• When installing the IPM cover, it is important to
ensure the cover is properly positioned and fully
latched. Failure to do so may allow water to get
into the IPM, and possibly result in an electrical
system failure.
• When replacing a blown fuse, it is important to
use only a fuse having the correct amperage rating.
The use of a fuse with a rating other than indicated
may result in a dangerous electrical system overload. If a properly rated fuse continues to blow, it
indicates a problem in the circuit that must be
corrected.
371
VEHICLE STORAGE
If you will not be using your vehicle for more than
21 days, you may want to take steps to preserve your
battery.
• Disengage the mini-fuse in the Power Distribution
Center labeled IOD (Ignition Off-Draw).
• Disconnect the negative cable from the battery.
REPLACEMENT BULBS
All the inside bulbs are brass or glass wedge base.
Aluminum base bulbs are not approved and should not
be used for replacement.
LIGHT BULBS — Interior
Bulb Number
Front Header Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Center Dome Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . T578
Rear Cargo/Flashlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8–A35LF
7
372
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
LIGHTS BULBS — Exterior
Bulb Number
Low Beam/High Beam Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . H13
Front Park/Turn Signal/Side
Marker Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157AK or 3157A
Front Fog Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9145
Center High-Mounted Stop Light
(CHMSL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . LED Assembly
Rear Turn/Tail/Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3157
Backup Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W16W (921)
License Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . W5W
BULB REPLACEMENT
Headlights/Front Parking/Front Turn Signal
See your authorized dealer for replacement.
Fog Lights
1. Access light through the lower fascia cutout.
2. Rotate bulb and connector 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
3. Pull bulb off connector.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
Tail Lights, Rear Turn Signals and Backup Lights
1. Remove the two push-pins from the tail light housing.
373
2. Grasp the tail light and pull firmly to disengage the
light from the aperture panel.
7
374
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Twist and remove socket from light.
4. Remove the bulb from the socket and replace.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
License Lights
375
2. Rotate the socket 1/4 turn counterclockwise.
1. Use a screw driver to gently pry against the side of the
snap tab to remove the lamp from the liftgate.
7
376
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
3. Pull the bulb from the socket.
Center High-Mounted Stoplight
The light is an LED assembly. See your authorized dealer
for replacement.
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
377
FLUIDS AND CAPACITIES
Fuel (Approximate)
Engine Oil with Filter
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (SAE 5W-20, API Certified)
Cooling System *
2.0L and 2.4L Engine (MOPAR威 Engine Coolant/Antifreeze 5
Year/100,000 Mile Formula)
* Includes heater and coolant recovery bottle filled to MAX level.
U.S.
13.6 Gallons
Metric
51.5 Liters
4.5 Quarts
4.26 Liters
7.2 Quarts
6.8 Liters
7
378
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS
Engine
Component
Engine Coolant
Engine Oil
Engine Oil Filter
Spark Plugs
Fuel Selection
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 Antifreeze/Coolant 5 Year/100,000 Mile Formula HOAT (Hybrid
Organic Additive Technology)
Use API Certified SAE 5W-20 Engine Oil, meeting the requirements of
Chrysler Material Standard MS-6395. Refer to your engine oil filler cap for
correct SAE grade.
MOPAR威 Oil Filter (P/N 04884900AD or equivalent)
ZFR5F-11 (Gap 0.043 in [1.1 mm])
87 Octane
MAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE
379
Chassis
Component
Automatic Transaxle (CVT)
Manual Transaxle
Brake Master Cylinder
Power Steering Reservoir
Fluid, Lubricant, or Genuine Part
MOPAR威 CVTF + 4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MOPAR威 ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
MOPAR威 DOT 3, SAE J1703 should be used. If DOT 3, SAE J1703 brake
fluid is not available, then DOT 4 is acceptable. Use only recommended
brake fluids or equivalent.
MOPAR威 Power Steering Fluid +4 or ATF+4 Automatic Transmission Fluid
7
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
CONTENTS
䡵 Emissions Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 382
䡵 Maintenance Schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
▫ Required Maintenance Intervals . . . . . . . . . . 384
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
382
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
The Scheduled Maintenance services listed in bold type
must be done at the times or mileages specified to ensure
the continued proper functioning of the emissions control
system. These and all other maintenance services included in this manual, should be done to provide best
vehicle performance and reliability. More frequent mainS tenance may be needed for vehicles in severe operating
C conditions, such as dusty areas and very short trip
H driving.
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Inspection and service should also be done anytime a
malfunction is suspected.
NOTE: Maintenance, replacement or repair of the emissions control devices and systems on your vehicle may be
performed by any automotive repair establishment or
individual using any automotive part that has been
certified pursuant to U.S. EPA or in the State of California, California Air Resources Board regulations.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
The oil change indicator system will remind you that it is
time to take your vehicle in for scheduled maintenance.
On Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC)
equipped vehicles, “Oil Change Required” will be displayed in the EVIC and a single chime will sound,
indicating that an oil change is necessary.
On Non-EVIC equipped vehicles, “Change Oil” will flash
in the instrument cluster odometer and a single chime
will sound, indicating that an oil change is necessary.
Based on engine operation condition, the oil change
indicator message will illuminate; this means that service
is required for your vehicle. Have your vehicle serviced
as soon as possible, within the next 500 miles (805 km).
NOTE:
• The oil change indicator message will not monitor the
time since the last oil change. Change your vehicle’s
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
oil if it has been six months since your last oil change
and even if the oil change indicator message is NOT
illuminated.
• Change your engine oil more often if you drive your
vehicle off-road for an extended period of time.
• Under no circumstances should oil change intervals
exceed 6,000 miles (10 000 km) or six months, whichever comes first.
Your authorized dealer will reset the oil change indicator
message after completing the scheduled oil change. If this
scheduled oil change is performed by someone other
than your authorized dealer, the message can be reset by
referring to the steps described under “Oil Change
383 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
At Each Stop for Fuel
C
• Check the engine oil level about five minutes after a E
Required” in “Use Factory Settings” of the EVIC section
in this manual or under “Odometer/Trip Odometer” in
the Instrument Cluster Descriptions section of this
manual.
fully warmed engine is shut off. Checking the oil level
while the vehicle is on level ground will improve the
accuracy of the oil level reading. Add oil only when
the level is at or below the ADD or MIN mark.
S
C
H
E
D
U
• Check the windshield washer solvent and add if L
E
required.
S
8
M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
384
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
Once a Month
At Each Oil Change
• Check the tire pressure and look for unusual wear or
damage.
• Change the engine oil filter.
• Inspect the battery and clean and tighten the terminals
as required.
• Check the fluid levels of coolant reservoir, brake
master cylinder, power steering and transmission and
add as needed.
• Check all lights and other electrical items for correct
operation.
• Inspect the brake hoses and lines.
• Check the manual transmission fluid level.
CAUTION!
Failure to perform the required maintenance items
may result in damage to the vehicle.
Required Maintenance Intervals
Refer to the Maintenance Schedules on the following
pages for the required maintenance intervals.
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
6,000 Miles (10,000 km) or
6 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
12,000 Miles (20,000 km) or 12 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the CV joints. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
❏ Inspect exhaust system. Perform the first inspection at 12,000 miles (20 000 km) or
12 months.
385 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 386 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 18,000 Miles (30,000 km) or
T 18 Months Maintenance
E
N Service Schedule
A ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
N
C ❏ Rotate tires.
E
24,000 Miles (40,000 km) or 24 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Inspect the CV joints.
❏ Inspect exhaust system.
❏ Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
30,000 Miles (50,000 km) or
30 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
36,000 Miles (60,000 km) or
36 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
42,000 Miles (70,000 km) or
42 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L
PZEV).
❏ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
387 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 388 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 48,000 Miles (80,000 km) or 48 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
54,000 Miles (90,000 km) or
54 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
60,000 Miles (100,000 km) or 60 Months Maintenance Service
Schedule
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
Rotate tires.
Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L PZEV).
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter if using your vehicle for any of the
following: police, taxi, fleet, or frequent trailer towing.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant at 60 months if not done at 102,000 miles
(170 000 km).
389 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
66,000 Miles (110,000 km) or
66 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 390 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 72,000 Miles (120,000 km) or 72 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
❏
❏
❏
❏
78,000 Miles (130,000 km) or
78 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
84,000 Miles (140,000 km) or
84 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
90,000 Miles (150,000 km) or
90 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L
PZEV).
❏ Inspect and replace PCV valve if
necessary. †
❏ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
391 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 392 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 96,000 Miles (160,000 km) or 96 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
102,000 Miles (170,000 km) or
102 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (2.4L PZEV).
❏ Flush and replace the engine coolant if
not done at 60 months.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
108,000 Miles (180,000 km) or
108 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
114,000 Miles (190,000 km) or
114 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
393 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 394 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 120,000 Miles (200,000 km) or 120 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
C ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
E ❏ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
126,000 Miles (210,000 km) or
126 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L PZEV).
Change the automatic transmission fluid and filter.
Replace the accessory drive belt(s).
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
132,000 Miles (220,000 km) or
132 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
138,000 Miles (230,000 km) or
138 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ If using your vehicle for any of the
following: Dusty or off-road conditions.
Inspect the engine air cleaner filter;
replace if necessary.
❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if
necessary.
❏ Replace the air conditioning filter.
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
395 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
M 396 MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
A
I
N 144,000 Miles (240,000 km) or 144 Months Maintenance Service
T Schedule
E ❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil filter.
N
A ❏ Rotate tires.
N ❏ If using your vehicle for any of the following: Dusty or off-road conditions. Inspect the
engine air cleaner filter; replace if necessary.
C
E ❏ Inspect the brake linings; replace if necessary.
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
❏
❏
❏
❏
❏
Replace the air conditioning filter.
Inspect the CV joints.
Inspect exhaust system.
Inspect the front suspension, tie rod ends and boot seals; replace if necessary.
Change the manual transmission fluid if using your vehicle for any of the following: trailer
towing, snow plowing, heavy loading, taxi, police, delivery service (commercial service),
off-road, desert operation or more than 50% of your driving is at sustained speeds during hot
weather, above 90°F (32°C).
150,000 Miles (250,000 km) or
150 Months Maintenance
Service Schedule
❏ Change the engine oil and engine oil
filter.
❏ Rotate tires.
❏ Replace the engine air cleaner filter.
❏ Replace the spark plugs (except 2.4L
PZEV).
❏ Adjust the parking brake on vehicles
equipped with four-wheel disc brakes.
8
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
Odometer Reading
Repair Order #
Signature Authorized Chrysler Dealer
Date
Dealer Code
MAINTENANCE SCHEDULES
† This maintenance is recommended by the manufacturer
to the owner, but is not required to maintain emissions
warranty.
WARNING!
You can be badly injured working on or around a
motor vehicle. Do only that service work for which
you have the knowledge and the right equipment. If
you have any doubt about your ability to perform a
service job, take your vehicle to a competent mechanic.
397 M
A
I
N
T
E
N
A
N
C
E
S
C
H
E
D
U
L
E
S
8
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
CONTENTS
䡵 Suggestions For Obtaining Service For Your
Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or
Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY) . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Prepare For The Appointment . . . . . . . . . . . 401
▫ Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
▫ Prepare A List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 Warranty Information (U.S. Vehicles Only) . . . . 404
▫ Be Reasonable With Requests . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 MOPAR威 Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
䡵 If You Need Assistance
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
䡵 Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Chrysler LLC Customer Center . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ In The 50 United States And Washington,
D.C. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
▫ Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center . . . . . 402
▫ In Mexico Contact . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 402
▫ In Canada . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
9
400
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
䡵 Publication Order Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
▫ Traction Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
䡵 Department Of Transportation Uniform Tire
Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
▫ Temperature Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
▫ Treadwear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 407
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR
YOUR VEHICLE
Prepare For The Appointment
If you’re having warranty work done, be sure to have the
right papers with you. Take your warranty folder. All
work to be performed may not be covered by the
warranty. Discuss additional charges with the service
manager. Keep a maintenance log of your vehicle’s
service history. This can often provide a clue to the
current problem.
Prepare A List
Make a written list of your vehicle’s problems or the
specific work you want done. If you’ve had an accident
or work done that is not on your maintenance log, let the
service advisor know.
Be Reasonable With Requests
If you list a number of items and you must have your
vehicle by the end of the day, discuss the situation with
401
the service advisor and list the items in order of priority.
At many authorized dealers, you may obtain a rental
vehicle at a minimal daily charge. If you need a rental, it
is advisable to make these arrangements when you call
for an appointment.
IF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE
The manufacturer and its authorized dealers are vitally
interested in your satisfaction. We want you to be happy
with our products and services.
Warranty service must be done by an authorized dealer.
We strongly recommend that you take the vehicle to an
authorized dealer. They know you and the vehicle best,
and are most concerned that you get prompt and high
quality service. The manufacturer’s authorized dealers
have the facilities, factory-trained technicians, special
tools, and the latest information to ensure the vehicle is
fixed correctly and in a timely manner.
9
402
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
This is why you should always talk to an authorized
dealer’s service manager first. Most matters can be resolved with this process.
• If for some reason you are still not satisfied, talk to the
general manager or owner of the authorized dealership. They want to know if you need assistance.
• If an authorized dealership is unable to resolve the
concern, you may contact the manufacturer’s customer
center.
Any communication to the manufacturer’s customer center should include the following information:
• Owner’s name and address
• Owner’s telephone number (home and office)
• Authorized dealership name
• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
• Vehicle delivery date and mileage
Chrysler LLC Customer Center
P.O. Box 21–8004
Auburn Hills, MI 48321–8004
Phone: (800) 992-1997
Chrysler Canada Inc. Customer Center
P.O. Box 1621
Windsor, Ontario N9A 4H6
Phone: (800) 465–2001
In Mexico contact:
Av. Prolongacion Paseo de la Reforma, 1240
Sante Fe C.P. 05109
Mexico, D. F.
In Mexico City: 5081-7568
Outside Mexico City: 1-800-505-1300
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Customer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech
Impaired (TDD/TTY)
To assist customers who have hearing difficulties, the
manufacturer has installed special TDD (Telecommunication Devices for the Deaf) equipment at its customer
center. Any hearing or speech impaired customer, who
has access to a TDD or a conventional teletypewriter
(TTY) in the United States, can communicate with the
manufacturer by dialing 1–800–380–CHRY.
Service Contract
You may have purchased a service contract for a vehicle
to help protect you from the high cost of unexpected
repairs after the manufacturer’s New Vehicle Limited
Warranty expires. The manufacturer stands behind only
the manufacturer’s service contracts. If you purchased a
manufacturer’s service contract, you will receive Plan
Provisions and an Owner Identification Card in the mail
within three weeks of the vehicle delivery date. If you
403
have any questions about the service contract, call the
manufacturer’s Service Contract National Customer Hotline at 1-800-521-9922.
The manufacturer will not stand behind any service
contract that is not the manufacturer’s service contract. It
is not responsible for any service contract other than the
manufacturer’s service contract. If you purchased a service contract that is not a manufacturer’s service contract,
and you require service after the manufacturer’s New
Vehicle Limited Warranty expires, please refer to the
contract documents, and contact the person listed in
those documents.
We appreciate that you have made a major investment
when you purchased the vehicle. An authorized dealer
has also made a major investment in facilities, tools, and
training to assure that you are absolutely delighted with
9
404
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
the ownership experience. You’ll be pleased with their
sincere efforts to resolve any warranty issues or related
concerns.
WARNING!
Engine exhaust, some of its constituents, and certain
vehicle components contain, or emit, chemicals
known to the State of California to cause cancer and
birth defects, or other reproductive harm. In addition, certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain
products of component wear contain, or emit, chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer
and birth defects, or other reproductive harm.
WARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only)
See the Warranty Information Booklet for the terms and
provisions of Chrysler Motors LLC warranties applicable
to this vehicle.
MOPAR姞 PARTS
Mopar威 fluids, lubricants, parts, and accessories are
available from an authorized dealer. They will help keep
the vehicle operating at its best.
REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS
In The 50 United States And Washington, D.C.
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect that could
cause a crash or cause injury or death, you should
immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to notifying the
manufacturer.
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may open an
investigation, and if it finds that a safety defect exists in
a group of vehicles, it may order a recall and remedy
campaign. However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your authorized
dealer, and the manufacturer.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto Safety
Hotline toll free at 1–888–327–4236 (TTY: 1–800–424– 9153),
or go to http://www.safercar.gov; or write to: Administrator, NHTSA, 400 Seventh Street, SW., Washington, D.C.
20590. You can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.
In Canada
If you believe that your vehicle has a safety defect, you
should contact the Customer Service Department immediately. Canadian customers who wish to report a safety
defect to the Canadian government should write to:
Transport Canada, Motor Vehicle Defect Investigations
and Recalls, 2780 Sheffield Road, Ottawa, Ontario K1B
3V9.
405
PUBLICATION ORDER FORMS
To order the following manuals, you may use either the
website or the phone numbers listed below. Visa, Mastercard, American Express, and Discover orders are accepted. If you prefer mailing your payment, please call
for an order form.
NOTE: A street address is required when ordering
manuals (no P.O. Boxes).
• Service Manuals
These comprehensive Service Manuals provide the
information that students and professional technicians
need in diagnosing/troubleshooting, problem solving,
maintaining, servicing, and repairing Chrysler LLC
vehicles. A complete working knowledge of the vehicle, system, and/or components is written in
straightforward language with illustrations, diagrams,
and charts.
9
406
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
• Diagnostic Procedure Manuals
Diagnostic Procedure Manuals are filled with diagrams, charts and detailed illustrations. These practical manuals make it easy for students and technicians
to find and fix problems on computer-controlled vehicle systems and features. They show exactly how to
find and correct problems the first time, using step-bystep troubleshooting and drivability procedures,
proven diagnostic tests and a complete list of all tools
and equipment.
• Owner’s Manuals
These Owner’s Manuals have been prepared with the
assistance of service and engineering specialists to
acquaint you with specific Chrysler LLC vehicles.
Included are starting, operating, emergency and maintenance procedures as well as specifications, capabilities and safety tips.
Call toll free at:
• 1–800–890–4038 (U.S.)
• 1–800–387–1143 (Canada)
Or
Visit us on the Worldwide Web at:
• www.techauthority.com
DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM
TIRE QUALITY GRADES
The following tire grading categories were established by
the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration. The
specific grade rating assigned by the tire’s manufacturer
in each category is shown on the sidewall of the tires on
your vehicle.
All passenger car tires must conform to Federal safety
requirements in addition to these grades.
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Treadwear
The Treadwear grade is a comparative rating, based on
the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled
conditions on a specified government test course. For
example, a tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
times as well on the government course as a tire graded
100. The relative performance of tires depends upon the
actual conditions of their use, however, and may depart
significantly from the norm due to variations in driving
habits, service practices, and differences in road characteristics and climate.
Traction Grades
The Traction grades, from highest to lowest, are AA, A, B,
and C. These grades represent the tire’s ability to stop on
wet pavement, as measured under controlled conditions
on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and
concrete. A tire marked C may have poor traction performance.
407
WARNING!
The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on
straight-ahead braking traction tests, and does not
include acceleration, cornering, hydroplaning, or
peak traction characteristics.
Temperature Grades
The temperature grades are A (the highest), B, and C,
representing the tire’s resistance to the generation of heat
and its ability to dissipate heat, when tested under
controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
test wheel. Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life, and
excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure. The
grade C corresponds to a level of performance, which all
passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor
9
408
IF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE
Vehicle Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test
wheel, than the minimum required by law.
WARNING!
The temperature grade for this tire is established for
a tire that is properly inflated and not overloaded.
Excessive speed, under-inflation, or excessive loading, either separately or in combination, can cause
heat buildup and possible tire failure.
INDEX
10
410
INDEX
ABS (Anti-Lock Brake System) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Adding Engine Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . 355
Adding Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Adding Washer Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Additives, Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Air Cleaner, Engine (Engine Air Cleaner Filter) . . . 347
Air Conditioner Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349
Air Conditioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Air Conditioning Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Air Conditioning, Operating Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . 242
Air Conditioning Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . 349,350
Air Conditioning System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236,349
Air Pressure, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49
Airbag Deployment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57
Airbag Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,73,171
Airbag Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Airbag, Side . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Airbag, Window (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Alarm Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Alarm System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Alterations/Modifications, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Antenna, Satellite Radio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . 354,377,378
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266
Anti-Lock Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Anti-Theft Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . 18
Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Assistance Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Automatic Dimming Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Automatic Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28,29
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . 12,249,253,325,361
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Interlock System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 325
Selection Of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
INDEX
Shifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
Special Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 348
Keyless Transmitter Replacement (RKE) . . . . . . . 25
Belts, Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Beverage Cooler . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Body Mechanism Lubrication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
B-Pillar Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Brake Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Brake, Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,359
Anti-Lock (ABS) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 266,269
Master Cylinder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Parking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Brakes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 265,359
411
Brake/Transmission Interlock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 254
Break-In Recommendations, New Vehicle . . . . . . . . 70
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371,372
Bulbs, Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,371
Capacities, Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . 377
Capacities, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Caps, Filler
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Oil (Engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,346
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Car Washes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Carbon Monoxide Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,305
Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
Cargo Area Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cargo Compartment
Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cargo Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Cargo Load Floor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 156
10
412
INDEX
Cargo Tie-Downs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Cellular Phone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83,236
Center High Mounted Stop Light . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Chains, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Changing A Flat Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Chart, Tire Sizing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Check Engine Light
(Malfunction Indicator Light) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175,342
Checking Your Vehicle For Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Checks, Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Child Restraint Tether Anchors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Child Restraint with Automatic Belts . . . . . . . . . . . 65
Child Safety Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Child Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68
Clean Air Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Cleaning
Wheels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Climate Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,206,209,219
Clutch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Clutch Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Coin Holder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Compact Disc (CD) Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . 235
Compact Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Console . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
Contract, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377,378
Cooler, Beverage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Cooling System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Adding Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 355
Coolant Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354,357
Disposal of Used Coolant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Drain, Flush, and Refill . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 354
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Points to Remember . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356,358
Pressure Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 356
Selection of Coolant (Antifreeze) . . . . . . . . . . . 354
INDEX
Corrosion Protection
Cruise Light . . . . .
Cupholders . . . . . .
Customer Assistance
..
...
...
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
362
176
152
401
Data Recorder, Event . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Dealer Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Defroster, Rear Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Defroster, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,238
Delay (Intermittent) Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Diagnostic System, Onboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
Dipsticks
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Disposal
Antifreeze (Engine Coolant) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 357
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Door Locks, Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 28
Door Opener, Garage . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driver’s Seat Back Tilt . . . . . . . . . . . .
Driving
On Slippery Surfaces . . . . . . . . . . .
Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
413
. . . . . . . . 138
. . . . . . . . 253
. . . . . . . . 119
. . . . . . . . 259
. . . . . . . . 260
Electric Remote Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Electrical Power Outlets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
Electronic Brake Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . 268
Anti-Lock Brake System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Brake Assist System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 269
Electronic Stability Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Traction Control System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Electronic Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . 134
Electronic Stability Program (ESP) . . . . . . . . . . . . 270
Electronic Vehicle Information Center (EVIC) . . . . 180
10
414
INDEX
Emergency, In Case of
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Emission Control System Maintenance . . . . . . 342,382
Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340
Break-In Recommendations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Checking Oil Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 353
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,305
Fuel Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,377,378
Oil Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Oil Filler Cap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 340,346
Oil Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Oil Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Oil Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Overheating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Temperature Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Enhanced Accident Response Feature . . . . . . . . . . 58
Event Data Recorder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Exhaust Gas Caution . . . . . . . . . . . . 35,72,305,351,352
Exhaust System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72,351
Exterior Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Filler Location Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Filters
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347,378
Flashers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Hazard Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,177,373
Flat Tire Stowage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Flooded Engine Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Fluid, Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Fluid Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Fluid Leaks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fluid Level Checks
Automatic Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Power Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 263
Fluids . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fluids, Lubricants and Genuine Parts . . . . . . . . . . 378
Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,177,372
Folding Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Folding Rear Seat (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Freeing A Stuck Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Front Position Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,378
Adding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 305
Additives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 304
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Filler Cap (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,305
Filler Door (Gas Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Gauge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Light . . . . . . . . .
Octane Rating . .
Requirements . . .
Tank Capacity . .
Fuel System Caution
Fueling . . . . . . . . .
Fuses . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
..
..
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
INDEX
415
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
170
301
301
377
307
305
368
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Gas Cap (Fuel Filler Cap) . . . . . . . . . . . . 305,307,341
Gasoline, Clean Air . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301,377
Gasoline, Reformulated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 302
Gauges
Coolant Temperature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Gearshift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255
10
416
INDEX
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18,112,301
General Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Glass Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
Glove Compartment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160
Gross Axle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308,310
Hands-Free Phone (uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Hazard
Driving Through Flowing, Rising, or Shallow
Standing Water . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Hazard Warning Flasher . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 324
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 366
High Beam . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129
High Beam/Low Beam Select Switch . . . . . . . . 129
Passing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Replacing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heated Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Heater . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Hitches
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HomeLink威 (Garage Door Opener) Transmitter
Hood Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
. . . 126
. . . 120
. . . 236
. . . 312
. . . 138
. . . 124
Ignition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Key . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Ignition Key Removal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12
Immobilizer (Sentry Key) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Infant Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Information Center, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 180
Inside Rearview Mirror . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167,169
Instrument Panel and Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166
Instrument Panel Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
Instrument Panel Lens Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . 367
INDEX
Integrated Power Module (Fuses) . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Interior Appearance Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 365
Intermittent Wipers (Delay Wipers) . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Jack Location . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Jack Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326,327
Jacking Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Jump Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
Key, Programming . . . . . . . .
Key, Replacement . . . . . . . .
Key, Sentry (Immobilizer) . . .
Key-In Reminder . . . . . . . . .
Keyless Entry System (Sedan)
Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
17
16
15
15
20
12
Lane Change and Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Lap/Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
417
Latches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Hood . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124
Lead Free Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Leaks, Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Liftgate Window Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Light Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,371
Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,126
Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59,73,171
Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Anti-Lock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177
Back-Up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Brake Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Bulb Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 372
Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 154
Center Mounted Stop . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 376
Dimmer Switch, Headlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
10
418
INDEX
Electronic Stability Program (ESP)
Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271,273
Engine Temperature Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Exterior . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74
Fog . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,177,372
Headlight Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
Headlights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
High Beam Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 178
Instrument Cluster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
License . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
Lights On Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
Low Fuel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Malfunction Indicator (Check Engine) . . . . . . . . 175
Map Reading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Oil Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . 19,171
Service Engine Soon (Malfunction Indicator) . . . 175
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171
Tire Pressure Monitoring (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Traction Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 271
Turn Signal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,126,128,373
Voltage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
Warning (Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . 169
Loading Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307,309
Capacities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Locks
Child Protection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31
Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 26
Power Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Lubrication, Body . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Maintenance Free Battery
Maintenance, General . . .
Maintenance Procedures .
Maintenance Schedule . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
348
344
344
382
INDEX
Malfunction Indicator Light (Check Engine) . . 175,342
Manual, Service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249,251,362
Downshifting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Fluid Level Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Frequency of Fluid Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Lubricant Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Map/Reading Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Master Cylinder (Brakes) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 359
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Automatic Dimming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Electric Powered . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Outside . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80
Rearview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
Vanity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Modifications/Alterations, Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Monitor, Tire Pressure System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Mopar Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343,404
Multi-Function Control Lever . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126
419
New Vehicle Break-In Period . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Occupant Restraints (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Octane Rating, Gasoline (Fuel) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174,176
Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Oil, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344,377
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 377
Change Interval . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Checking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 344
Disposal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 347
Identification Logo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Materials Added to . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Recommendation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345,377
Synthetic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Viscosity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Onboard Diagnostic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 341,342
10
420
INDEX
Opener, Garage Door (HomeLink威) . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Operator Manual (Owner’s Manual) . . . . . . . . . . . . 4
Outside Air Intake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Overheating, Engine . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169,324
Owner’s Manual (Operator Manual) . . . . . . . . . 4,405
Paint Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 362
Panic Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 24
Parking Brake . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264
Passing Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
Personal Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Phone, Cellular . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Phone, Hands-Free (uconnect威) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Placard, Tire and Loading Information . . . . . . . . . 279
Power
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 27
Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
Outlet (Auxiliary Electrical Outlet) . . . . . . . . . . 148
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,263
Sunroof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power Steering Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 379
Pregnant Women and Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Preparation for Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 327
Pretensioners
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Programmable Electronic Features . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Radial Ply Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Radio Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 236
Radio, Satellite (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Rear Fog Lights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Rear Liftgate (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 34
Rear Seat, Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear Window Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159
Rear Window Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
INDEX
Rear Wiper/Washer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158
Recorder, Event Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59
Recreational Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Refrigerant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 350
Reminder, Seat Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Remote Control
Door Locks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Security Alarm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Remote Keyless Entry (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 20
Remote Sound System (Radio) Controls . . . . . . . . 234
Replacement Bulbs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Replacement Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Replacement Parts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 343
Replacement Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Reporting Safety Defects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Resetting Oil Change Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Restraints, Child . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62,68
Restraints, Infant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Retractable Cargo Area Cover . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155
421
Rotation, Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Safety Checks Inside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Safety Checks Outside Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Safety Defects, Reporting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Safety, Exhaust Gas . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72
Safety Information, Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Safety Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71
Satellite Radio Antenna . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231
Satellite Radio (uconnect威 studios) . . . . . . . . . . . 229
Schedule, Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 382
Seat Belt Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 368
Seat Belt Reminder . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 47
Seat Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Adjustable Shoulder Belt . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42
Adjustable Upper Shoulder Anchorage . . . . . . . . 42
And Pregnant Women . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48
Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
Front Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
10
422
INDEX
Inspection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Pretensioners . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46
Rear Seat . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Seat Belts (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36
Seats . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117
Head Restraints . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Heated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120
Lumbar Support . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Rear Folding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Rear Folding (Sedan) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123
Seatback Release . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Tilting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 119
Security Alarm (Theft Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Selection of Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Sentry Key (Immobilizer) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15
Sentry Key Programming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17
Sentry Key Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16
Service Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 401
Service Contract . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 403
Service Engine Soon Light
(Malfunction Indicator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175
Service Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 405
Setting the Clock . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 192,206,209,219
Settings, Personal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185
Shift Speeds, Manual Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Shoulder Belts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37
Side Airbag . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 55
Side Window Demisters (Defrosters) . . . . . . . . . . 244
Signals, Turn . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74,177,373
Slippery Surfaces, Driving On . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Snow Chains (Tire Chains) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286,287,326
Specifications
Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345
Speed Control (Cruise Control) . . . . . . . . . . . 134,176
Speedometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
INDEX
Speedometer and Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 167
Starting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Automatic Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Engine Fails to Start . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 250
Manual Transmission . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Starting Procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 249
Steering
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 262,263
Tilt Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Steering Wheel Mounted Sound
System Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234
Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Stuck, Freeing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333
Sun Roof . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Sun Visor Extension . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Supplemental Restraint System - Airbag . . . . . . . . 49
Synthetic Engine Oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 346
Tachometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170
423
Taillights . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 373
Temperature Gauge, Engine Coolant . . . . . . . 169,325
Tether Anchor, Child Restraint . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66
Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Theft System (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
Tie Down Hooks, Cargo . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157
Tilt Steering Column . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
Tire and Loading Information Placard . . . . . . . . . 279
Tire Identification Number (TIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 278
Tire Markings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tire Safety Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274
Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73,283,406
Aging (Life of Tires) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Air Pressure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Compact Spare . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Flat Changing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 331
General Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 283
10
424
INDEX
High Speed . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 285
Inflation Pressures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 284
Jacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Life of Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 289
Load Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279
Pressure Monitor System (TPMS) . . . . . . . . . . . 293
Pressure Warning Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Quality Grading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Radial . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 286
Replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 290
Rotation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292
Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 274,283
Sizes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 276
Snow Tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 291
Spare Tire . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 326
Spinning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Tongue Weight/Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
24-Hour Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Disabled Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 334
Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Recreational . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 321
Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Towing Assistance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98
Traction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 259
Trailer Towing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310
Cooling System Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 320
Hitches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312
Minimum Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 315
Trailer and Tongue Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314
Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318
Trailer Towing Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Trailer Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313
Transaxle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Automatic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12,249,253,361
Autostick . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Manual . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14,249,251
INDEX
Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 253
Overdrive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257
Selection of Lubricant . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 361
Transmission
Range Indicator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172
Transmitter Battery Service
(Remote Keyless Entry) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
Transmitter, Garage Door Opener (HomeLink威) . . 138
Transporting Pets . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70
Tread Wear Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 288
Trip Odometer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174
Trip Odometer Reset Button . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176
Turn Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128,177,373
uconnect威 (Hands-Free Phone) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Understanding Your Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . . 166
Uniform Tire Quality Grades . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 406
Universal Transmitter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138
Unleaded Gasoline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301
425
Vanity Mirrors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83
Vehicle Certification Label . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 308
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Vehicle Loading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 279,307,309
Vehicle Modifications/Alterations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7
Vehicle Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 371
Vehicle Theft Alarm (Security Alarm) . . . . . . . . . . 18
Voice Recognition System (VR) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
Warning Lights
(Instrument Cluster Description) . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169
Warnings and Cautions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6
Warranty Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 404
Washer, Adding Fluid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 351
Washers, Windshield . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Washing Vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 363
Water
Driving Through . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260
Wheel and Wheel Trim . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
10
426
INDEX
Wheel and Wheel Trim Care . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 364
Wind Buffeting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147
Window Airbag (Side Curtain) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50
Window Fogging . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 243
Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Power . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 32
Windshield Defroster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73
Windshield Washers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,132
Windshield Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131,350
Wipers, Intermittent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132
Default Page Layout
INTRODUCTION INTRODUCTION HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL WARNINGS AND CAUTIONS VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER VEHICLE MODIFICATIONS/ALTERATIONS THINGS TO KNOW BEFORE STARTING YOUR VEHICLE A WORD ABOUT YOUR KEYS Ignition Key RemovalLocking Doors With The KeyKey-In-Ignition ReminderSENTRY KEY Replacement KeysCustomer Key ProgrammingGeneral InformationVEHICLE SECURITY ALARM - IF EQUIPPED To Set The Security AlarmTo Disarm
The SystemVehicle Security Alarm Manual OverrideREMOTE KEYLESS ENTRY - IF EQUIPPED To Unlock The Doors And LiftgateRemote Key Unlock, Driver Door/All First PressIlluminated Approach - If EquippedTo Lock The Doors And LiftgateSound Horn With Remote Key LockFlash Lights With Remote Key Lock/UnlockUsing The Panic AlarmProgramming Additional RKE TransmittersGeneral InformationRKE Transmitter Battery ReplacementDOOR LOCKS Manual Door LocksPower Door LocksChild-Protection
Door Lock System (Rear Doors) - If EquippedPOWER WINDOWS - IF EQUIPPED Power Window Switches Auto DownWindow Lockout SwitchLIFTGATE OCCUPANT RESTRAINTS Lap/Shoulder BeltsAdjustable Upper Shoulder Belt AnchorageSecond Row Center Lap/Shoulder Belt Operating InstructionsSeat Belt Pretensioners Enhanced Seat Belt Use Reminder System (BeltAlert) Seat Belts And Pregnant WomenDriver And Front Passenger Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) - AirbagChild Restraints
ENGINE BREAK-IN RECOMMENDATIONS SAFETY TIPS Transporting PassengersExhaust GasSafety Checks You Should Make Inside The VehiclePeriodic Safety Checks You Should Make Outside The VehicleUNDERSTANDING THE FEATURES OF YOUR VEHICLE MIRRORS Inside Day/Night MirrorAutomatic Dimming Inside Mirror - If EquippedOutside Mirror - Drivers SideOutside Mirror - Passengers SidePower Mirrors - If EquippedVanity Mirrors - If EquippedSun Visor Sliding Featureuconnect phone
- IF EQUIPPED OperationPhone Call Featuresuconnect phone FeaturesAdvanced Phone ConnectivityThings You Should Know About Your uconnect phoneGeneral InformationVOICE RECOGNITION SYSTEM (VR) - IF EQUIPPED Voice Recognition System (VR) OperationCommandsVoice TrainingSEATS Front Seat AdjustmentManual Seat Height Adjustment - If EquippedManual Lumbar - If EquippedDrivers Seatback ReclineAdjustable Head RestraintsHeated Seats - If EquippedFold-Flat Front Passenger
SeatFolding Rear SeatReclining Rear Seat - If EquippedTO OPEN AND CLOSE THE HOOD LIGHTS Multifunction LeverHeadlights, Parking Lights and Instrument Panel LightsLights-on ReminderFog Lights - If EquippedTurn SignalsHigh Beam/Low Beam Select SwitchFlash-to-PassMap/Reading LightsDaytime Running Lights (DRL) - If EquippedWINDSHIELD WIPERS AND WASHERS Windshield Wiper OperationIntermittent Wiper SystemWindshield WashersMist FeatureTILT STEERING COLUMN ELECTRONIC
SPEED CONTROL - IF EQUIPPED To ActivateTo Set At A Desired SpeedTo DeactivateTo Resume SpeedTo Vary The Speed SettingManual TransaxleTo Accelerate For PassingGARAGE DOOR OPENER - IF EQUIPPED Programming HomeLinkGate Operator/Canadian ProgrammingUsing HomeLinkReprogramming A Single HomeLink ButtonSecurityTroubleshooting TipsGeneral InformationPOWER SUNROOF - IF EQUIPPED Opening the SunroofClosing the SunroofPinch Protect FeaturePinch Protect Override
Venting Sunroof - ExpressSunshade OperationWind BuffetingSunroof MaintenanceIgnition Off OperationELECTRICAL POWER OUTLETS POWER INVERTER - IF EQUIPPED CUPHOLDERS CONSOLE FEATURES CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo Light/Removable Self-Recharging Flashlight - If EquippedCargo Cover - If EquippedRemovable Load FloorCargo Tie-Down LoopsFold Down Speakers - If EquippedREAR WINDOW FEATURES Rear Window Wiper/WasherRear Window DefrosterCOOLED BEVERAGE
STORAGE BIN/GLOVE COMPARTMENT - IF EQUIPPED UNDERSTANDING YOUR INSTRUMENT PANEL INSTRUMENT PANEL FEATURES INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - BASE INSTRUMENT CLUSTER - PREMIUM INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DESCRIPTIONS ELECTRONIC VEHICLE INFORMATION CENTER (EVIC) - If Equipped Oil Change RequiredEVIC Functions Compass/Temperature/AudioAverage Fuel EconomyDistance To Empty (DTE)Elapsed TimeTire Pressure Monitor (TPM)Personal Settings
(Customer-Programmable Features)SALES CODE REQ - AM/FM STEREO RADIO AND 6-DISC CD/DVD CHANGER (MP3/WMA AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - (DISC MODE for CD and MP3/WMA Audio Play, DVD-VIDEO)Notes On Playing MP3/WMA FilesLIST Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)INFO Button (DISC Mode for MP3/WMA Play)AM/FM/CD/DVD RADIO (RER/REN) - IF EQUIPPED Operating Instructions - Voice Recognition System (VR) - If Equipped
Operating Instructions - uconnect phone - If EquippedClock Setting ProcedureSALES CODE RES - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - CD MODE For CD And MP3 Audio PlayNotes on Playing MP3 FilesOperation Instructions - Auxiliary ModeSALES CODE RES/RSC - AM/FM STEREO RADIO WITH CD PLAYER (MP3 AUX JACK) AND SIRIUS RADIO Operating Instructions - Radio ModeOperation Instructions - CD MODE
for CD and MP3 Audio PlayNotes On Playing MP3 FilesLIST Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)INFO Button (CD Mode for MP3 Play)uconnect studios (SATELLITE RADIO) - IF EQUIPPED (REN/REQ/RER/RES/REU RADIOS ONLY) System ActivationElectronic Serial Number/Sirius Identification Number (ESN/SID)Selecting uconnect studios (Satellite) ModeSatellite AntennaReception QualityOperating Instructions - uconnect studios (Satellite) ModeOperating Instructions - uconnect phone (If Equipped)Operating
Instructions - Video Entertainment System (VES) (If Equipped)REMOTE SOUND SYSTEM CONTROLS - IF EQUIPPED Radio OperationCD PlayerCD/DVD MAINTENANCE RADIO OPERATION AND CELLULAR PHONES CLIMATE CONTROLS Manual Heating and Air Conditioning SystemAir Filtration System - If EquippedOperating Tips STARTING AND OPERATING STARTING PROCEDURES Manual Transmission - If EquippedAutomatic Transmission - If EquippedNormal StartingExtremely Cold Weather
(Below -20 degrees F Or -29 degrees C)If Engine Fails to StartAfter StartingMANUAL TRANSAXLE - IF EQUIPPED 5-Speed Manual TransaxleRecommended Shift SpeedsDownshiftingAUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE - IF EQUIPPED Brake/Transmission Interlock SystemAutomatic Transaxle Ignition Interlock SystemGear RangesAUTOSTICK - IF EQUIPPED OperationGeneral InformationDRIVING ON SLIPPERY SURFACES AccelerationTractionDRIVING THROUGH WATER Flowing/Rising WaterShallow Standing
WaterPOWER STEERING Power Steering Fluid CheckPARKING BRAKE BRAKE SYSTEM Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) - If EquippedELECTRONIC BRAKE CONTROL SYSTEM Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Brake Assist System (BAS)Traction Control System (TCS)Electronic Stability Program (ESP)TIRE SAFETY INFORMATION Tire Markings Tire Identification Number (TIN)Tire Loading and Tire PressureTIRES - GENERAL INFORMATION Tire PressureTire Inflation PressuresTire Pressures for High Speed
OperationRadial Ply TiresCompact Spare Tire - If EquippedLimited-Use Spare - If EquippedTire SpinningTread Wear IndicatorsLife of TireReplacement TiresTIRE CHAINS SNOW TIRES TIRE ROTATION RECOMMENDATIONS TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM (TPMS) Base SystemPremium System - If EquippedGeneral InformationFUEL REQUIREMENTS Reformulated GasolineGasoline/Oxygenate BlendsE-85 Usage In Non-Flex Fuel VehiclesMMT In GasolineMaterials Added To FuelFuel System
CautionsCarbon Monoxide WarningsADDING FUEL Fuel Filler Cap (Gas Cap)Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageVEHICLE LOADING Vehicle Certification LabelTRAILER TOWING Common Towing DefinitionsInstalling A Trailer HitchTrailer Hitch ClassificationTrailer Towing Weights (Maximum Trailer Weight Ratings)Trailer And Tongue WeightTowing RequirementsTowing TipsRECREATIONAL TOWING (BEHIND MOTORHOME, ETC.) Towing This Vehicle Behind Another Vehicle (Flat Towing With All Four Wheels
On The Ground)WHAT TO DO IN EMERGENCIES HAZARD WARNING FLASHER IF YOUR ENGINE OVERHEATS AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE OVERHEATING JACKING AND TIRE CHANGING Jack LocationSpare Tire StowagePreparations For JackingJacking InstructionsJUMP-STARTING PROCEDURES FREEING A STUCK VEHICLE TOWING A DISABLED VEHICLE With Ignition KeyWithout The Ignition KeyMAINTAINING YOUR VEHICLE ENGINE COMPARTMENT - 2.0L ENGINE COMPARTMENT
- 2.4L ONBOARD DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM - OBD II Loose Fuel Filler Cap MessageEMISSIONS INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE PROGRAMS REPLACEMENT PARTS DEALER SERVICE MAINTENANCE PROCEDURES Engine OilEngine Oil FilterEngine Air Cleaner FilterMaintenance-Free BatteryAir Conditioner MaintenanceBody LubricationWindshield Wiper BladesAdding Washer FluidExhaust SystemCooling SystemBrake SystemAutomatic Transaxle (CVT) - If EquippedManual Transaxle - If Equipped
Appearance Care And Protection From CorrosionFUSES Integrated Power Module (IPM)VEHICLE STORAGE REPLACEMENT BULBS BULB REPLACEMENT Headlights/Front Parking/Front Turn SignalFog LightsTail Lights, Rear Turn Signals and Backup Lights License LightsCenter High-Mounted StoplightFLUIDS AND CAPACITIES FLUIDS, LUBRICANTS, AND GENUINE PARTS EngineChassisMAINTENANCE SCHEDULES EMISSIONS CONTROL SYSTEM MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE SCHEDULE
Required Maintenance IntervalsIF YOU NEED CONSUMER ASSISTANCE SUGGESTIONS FOR OBTAINING SERVICE FOR YOUR VEHICLE Prepare For The AppointmentPrepare A ListBe Reasonable With RequestsIF YOU NEED ASSISTANCE Chrysler LLC Customer CenterChrysler Canada Inc. Customer CenterIn Mexico contactCustomer Assistance For The Hearing Or Speech Impaired (TDD/TTY)Service ContractWARRANTY INFORMATION (U.S. Vehicles Only) MOPAR PARTS REPORTING SAFETY
DEFECTS In The 50 United States And Washington, D.CIn CanadaPUBLICATION ORDER FORMS DEPARTMENT OF TRANSPORTATION UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADES TreadwearTraction GradesTemperature GradesINDEX
INSTALLATION OF RADIO TRANSMITTING
EQUIPMENT
Special design considerations are incorporated into this
vehicle’s electronic system to provide immunity to radio
frequency signals. Mobile two-way radios and telephone
equipment must be installed properly by trained personnel. The following must be observed during installation.
The positive power connection should be made directly
to the battery and fused as close to the battery as possible.
The negative power connection should be made to body
sheet metal adjacent to the negative battery connection.
This connection should not be fused.
Antennas for two-way radios should be mounted on the
roof or the rear area of the vehicle. Care should be used
in mounting antennas with magnet bases. Magnets may
affect the accuracy or operation of the compass on
vehicles so equipped.
The antenna cable should be as short as practical and
routed away from the vehicle wiring when possible. Use
only fully shielded coaxial cable.
Carefully match the antenna and cable to the radio to
ensure a low Standing Wave Ratio (SWR).
Mobile radio equipment with output power greater than
normal may require special precautions.
All installations should be checked for possible interference between the communications equipment and the
vehicle’s electronic systems.
Chrysler LLC
81-226-0939
Second Edition
Printed in U.S.A.